Maintenance DCF80-100 3B GB PDF

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 370

Empty container handler 8-10

tonnes

Publ. no UDCF05.01GB
Maintenance Manual in original MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DCF 80–100
A Foreword

B Safety

C Preventive maintenance

0 Complete machine

1 Engine
Maintenance Manual
2 Transmission
DCF 80–100
3 Driveline/axle

4 Brakes

5 Steering

6 Suspension

7 Load handling

8 Control system

9 Frame, body, cab and accessories

10 Common hydraulics

11 Common electrics

12 Common pneumatics

D Error codes

E Schematics

F Technical data

G Terminology and index


A:1

A Foreword

Contents A Foreword
Foreword ............................................................................................................ A:3
About the maintenance manual ...................................................................... A:3
General ...................................................................................................... A:3
Conditions .................................................................................................. A:3
Storage....................................................................................................... A:3
About the machine version......................................................................... A:3
Copyright .................................................................................................... A:3
Reading instructions ....................................................................................... A:4
Warning information ................................................................................... A:4
Important information ................................................................................. A:4
Read operator's manual ............................................................................. A:4
Read maintenance manual ........................................................................ A:4
Maintenance manual's content................................................................... A:5
Function group structure ............................................................................ A:6
Product alternatives and optional equipment ............................................. A:6
Machine card.............................................................................................. A:7
Function descriptions ................................................................................. A:7
About the documentation .............................................................................. A:10
The documentation's parts ....................................................................... A:10
Ordering of documentation....................................................................... A:10
Feedback .......................................................................................................A:11
Form for copying .......................................................................................A:11

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


A:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


A Foreword – Foreword A:3

A Foreword
About the maintenance manual
General
Thank you for selecting Cargotec as your machine supplier. We hope
that we will meet your expectations.

The maintenance manual contains information about how the machine


should be maintained for maximal operating reliability and service
life as well as troubleshooting information for fast correction of any
malfunctions.

Conditions
The instructions are based on use of general tools available in stores.
All lifting devices, e.g., straps, slings, ratchet blocks, etc., must meet
governing national regulations for lifting devices.

Cargotec will not accept any responsibility for modifications performed


without permission from Cargotec or in the event of the use of lifting
devices, tools or work methods other than those described in this
manual.

Storage

NOTE
The maintenance manual shall be accessible to service personnel.

About the machine version


The information in this publication corresponds to the machine's
design and appearance when delivered from Cargotec. There may be
differences due to customisation of the machine.

Cargotec reserves the right to change specifications and equipment


without prior notification. The information in the manual is valid at the
time of publication.

DANGER
External equipment may only be used if it is approved
by Cargotec.
Risk of fatal accidents and property damage!
Only used equipment approved by Cargotec.

Copyright
Cargotec Sweden AB
Duplication of the content in this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly
prohibited without written permission from Cargotec Sweden AB.

Duplication by any means such as copying, printing, etc., is prohibited.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


A:4 A Foreword – Reading instructions

Reading instructions
Warning information
Warnings inform of potential hazards that, if warnings are not heeded,
may result in personal injury or product damage.

DANGER
Situation that may lead to severe personal injury or
fatality if the rule is not followed.

WARNING
Situation that may lead to personal injury if the rule is
not followed.

CAUTION
Situation that may lead to product damage if the rule
is not followed.

Important information
Important information is indicated by NOTE, and is provided to
facilitate the work process, handling or increase understanding of the
information.

NOTE
Information that is important without being related to safety.

Read operator's manual


The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
refers to important information in the operator's manual.
000262

Read the operator's manual

Read maintenance manual


The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
001128

refers to important information in the maintenance manual.

Read the maintenance manual

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


A Foreword – Reading instructions A:5

Maintenance manual's content


The information in the maintenance manual is divided into function
groups (0-12) to facilitate searching for information. The manual is
divided in 20 sections A-C, 0-12, D-G. The sections with letters contain
specific information that applies to several function groups and is not
bound to a function, e.g., section "F Technical data". This is described
in greater detail in the table below.

For more information about function groups, see Function group


structure, page A:6.

A Foreword General information about the maintenance manual's purpose, content and
reading instructions as well as survey for feedback of views and eventual
inaccuracies.
B Safety Keep in mind for your safety.
C Preventive maintenance General information about preventive maintenance of the machine.
0 Complete machine
1 Engine
2 Transmission
3 Driveline/Axle
4 Brakes
Technical description, description of the machine's functions with schematic
5 Steering drawings and explanatory texts for the included components.
6 Suspension Overviews with the components' position on the machine.
7 Load handling Work instructions for preventive maintenance.
8 Control system Work instructions for checking and adjusting.
9 Frame, body, cab and
accessories
10 Common hydraulics
11 Common electrics
12 Common pneumatics
D Error codes Error code information is found in the Workshop manual and Operator's manual.
E Diagrams Wiring diagrams and hydraulic diagrams are found in the Workshop manual.
F Technical data Technical data, conversion tables, information for conversion of units.
G Terminology and index General terminology and abbreviations, explanations of terms and abbreviations
that may appear in the manual, index for headings in the manual.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


A:6 A Foreword – Reading instructions

Function group structure


The information in the manual is divided in a structure of functions
at different levels, based on the machine's design and use, called
function groups.

The upper level (called main group) determines group, e.g., group 7
Load handling. The second level (called two-digit) determines function,
e.g., 7.2 Lifting/lowering. The third and fourth levels are used to break
down functions into smaller parts (components).

The function groups' structure for main group and two-digit group level
are common for all machines from Cargotec, e.g., 4.3 Power-assisted
brake system. Machine-unique adaptations of function groups are
done at the third and fourth group level, e.g., 4.3.9 Wheel brake and
4.3.9.1 Disc pack. This means that some function groups (headings)
will be left out of the documentation for certain machines since the
machine does not have that particular function or component. In turn,
this means that the function groups' numbering may 'skip', e.g., the
three-digit heading level 4.8.7 Oil cooler may be included for some
machines but not for others.

The idea is that the function groups are intended to work as a search
term to find different types of information between different sections and
manuals. The information under a function group is divided into smaller
sections according to the type of content, e.g., description or change.

The maintenance manual and workshop manual contain different


information. The maintenance manual only includes information
needed for preventive maintenance as well as simpler troubleshooting.
The workshop manual includes more in-depth information and repair
instructions.

References between sections in the same manual are indicated with


section and group number, e.g., "see section 4 Brakes, group 4.3.9
Wheel brake". References within a section are indicated with a page
number, e.g., "see Sensor fuel level, description page 24".

References are not given between Maintenance manual and Workshop


manual. If more information is desired for a function group, the primary
recommendation is to search under the same function group in the
other manual.

Product alternatives and optional equipment


The information in the manual is divided in modules. For product
alternatives and optional equipment, handling of the modules differs
depending on if it is the one or the other that is described, see below.

Special equipment is not described in the manual. If you're uncertain


about what equipment the machine should have, use the machine card
to decide which information applies, see Machine card, page A:7.
Product alternatives
Product alternatives
000264

Product alternatives are such options that exclude certain standard


Symbol indicating optional equipment equipment (e.g., engine alternative).

Equivalent information for different product alternatives is described


in separate sections following each other under the same function
group. To indicate that there are different alternatives, the supplement
"Product alternative" is used in the heading together with a simple
description of which alternative is described, e.g., "(Product alternative
Climate control unit ECC)". In addition, alternatives that are optional
are marked with the symbol for optional equipment.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


A Foreword – Reading instructions A:7

Optional equipment

Optional equipment are options that can be added to the standard


equipment to obtain additional or improved functions.

Information for optional equipment is described in separate sections


with the standard equipment as starting point. Description of the
optional equipment describes how the standard function is affected by
the option as well as which additional components are added.

Machine card

NOTE
If the machine has been modified after delivery the information on
the machine card may be lacking or incorrect.

IMPORTANT
Changes done on the machine shall be reported to
Cargotec so that the machine card can be updated. A
new updated machine card is sent on the request of
the customer.

The machine card indicates of which drawings the machine consists,


in many cases these can be associated to options and product
alternatives. For more information on handling product alternatives and
optional equipment, see Product alternatives and optional equipment,
page A:6. The machine card is supplied with the spare parts catalogue
and should be in the cab.

The machine card is divided in the same function groups as the spare
parts catalogue, maintenance manual, and workshop manual. For
practical reasons, the machine card only uses the first and second
level of the function group index. The function groups are written in
groups of four characters, e.g., group 0107 corresponds to group 1.7
Cooling system in the manual.

For more information about how the machine card is used for ordering
spare parts, see the parts catalogue's foreword.

If the information on the machine card does not help, contact Cargotec.

NOTE
All documents that accompany the machine are non-registered
documents and there will be no notification of changes.

Function descriptions
Function descriptions are schematic overviews that describe how a
function works as well as which components and signals work together.

The function descriptions describe the function in a logical flow from


input signal to desired output signal. Most functions require that
pre-determined conditions are fulfilled for that function to be activated.
In these cases the conditions are listed above the figure.

Function descriptions use symbols to illustrate components such as


valves, sensors, etc.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


A:8 A Foreword – Reading instructions

7
2

6 3

014725

Example of function description


1. Hydraulic force (solid double line) 4. Illustration of function, (applied brake)
2. Flag pressure check connection (Check point), 5. Component list
indicates that there is a measuring outlet for checking
6. Position number in illustration, reference to
the pressure signal
component list
3. Flag diagnostic test, indicates that the signal can be
7. Electric power (solid single line)
checked with diagnostic test, see section 8 Control
system, group 8.4 Diagnostics

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


A Foreword – Reading instructions A:9

Symbol explanation function descriptions


Symbol explanation function descriptions
1 2
The following symbols are used in function descriptions, the symbols
3 4 are based on standard symbols used in wiring and hydraulic diagrams.
1. Electric control signal
2. Electric force
5 6
3. Hydraulic control signal
4. Hydraulic force
5. Hydraulic motor
7 8 M 6. Hydraulic oil pump with variable displacement
7. Hydraulic oil pump with fixed displacement
8. Electric motor

9 10 9. Accumulator
10. Disc brake
11. Filter
11 12 12. Radiator
13. Bulb
D790-1 14. Control system, two control units with CAN-bus
13 14 15. Restriction
D797-F 16. Adjustable restriction
17. Inductive position sensor
15 16 18. Electrically controlled servo valve
19. Thermal bypass valve
17 18 20. Temperature-controlled switch
21. Temperature sensor
19 °C 20 °C
22. Pressure sensor

°C Pa
23. Pressure-controlled switch
21 22
24. Hydraulic cylinder
25. Double-acting hydraulic cylinder
23 Pa 24
26. Spring brake cylinder
27. Valve block
25 28. Shuttle valve
29. Non-return valve

26 27

28 29
014726

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


A:10 A Foreword – About the documentation

About the documentation


The documentation's parts
The documentation for the machine consists of the following parts:
Operator's manual
The operator's manual is delivered with the machine in the cab.
Documentation kit
Maintenance manual and spare parts catalogue with machine card are
delivered to the machine as a separate documentation kit.
Supplementary documentation
Supplementary documentation can be ordered for the machine.
• Workshop manual
• Supplier documentation for engine, transmission and drive axle.

Ordering of documentation
The documentation is ordered from the dealer for Cargotec.

Always specify publication number when ordering.

For publication number, see the machine card.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


A Foreword – Feedback A:11

Feedback
Form for copying
Cargotec's ambition is that you who work with maintenance of Kalmar
machines shall have access to correct information.

Your feedback is important to be able to improve the information.

Copy this form, write down your views and send it to us. Thanks for
your help!

To: Cargotec Sweden AB


Technical Documentation
Torggatan 3
SE-340 10 Lidhult
SWEDEN
Fax: +46 372 263 93
From:
Company / Sender: ..........................................................................................................................................

Telephone: ..........................................................................................................................................................

E-mail: .................................................................................................................................................................

Date: .................................... - .................. - ..................


Manual in-
formation
Name / Publication number: .............................................................................................................................

Section / page number: ......................................................................................................................................


Sugges-
tions,
.............................................................................................................................................................................
views, re-
marks,
etc.
.............................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


A:12

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B:1

B Safety

Contents B Safety
Safety.................................................................................................................. B:3
General safety information.............................................................................. B:3
Safety concerns everyone!......................................................................... B:3
A near accident is a warning! ..................................................................... B:3
Safety instructions........................................................................................... B:4
General ...................................................................................................... B:4
Service position .......................................................................................... B:4
Hydraulic system, depressurising............................................................... B:5
Oils ............................................................................................................. B:6
Fuel system ................................................................................................ B:7
AdBlue........................................................................................................ B:8
Clothing, etc. .............................................................................................. B:9
Several mechanics on the same machine.................................................. B:9
Working under machine ............................................................................. B:9
Lifting heavy components ........................................................................ B:10
Vibrations ................................................................................................. B:10
Noise ........................................................................................................ B:10
Solvents ....................................................................................................B:11
Fire and explosion risks............................................................................ B:12
Fluid or gas under pressure ..................................................................... B:14
Coolant ..................................................................................................... B:14
Refrigerant ............................................................................................... B:15
Air pollution .............................................................................................. B:15
Tensioned springs .................................................................................... B:16
Electric motors ......................................................................................... B:16
Rotating components and tools................................................................ B:16
Tyres and rims.......................................................................................... B:17
Lifting equipment ...................................................................................... B:17
Spare parts............................................................................................... B:18
Non-ionised radiation ............................................................................... B:19
Environment.................................................................................................. B:20
General .................................................................................................... B:20

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety B:3

B Safety
General safety information
Safety concerns everyone!
The safety information concerns everyone who works with the machine!
Persons who do not follow the safety instructions in this manual must
make absolutely sure that the work is performed without risks of
personal injury, without risks of machine damage, or property damage!

Remember to:
• follow the instructions in this manual
• be trained for the work in question
• follow local laws, safety rules and regulations
• use the correct equipment and tools for the job
• wear the correct clothes
• use common sense and be careful. Do not take any risks!

Cargotec has in this publication documented and warned for situations


and risks that may occur in connection with using as well as service or
repairs of the machine during normal circumstances.

Therefore, it is very important that all who work with the machine, or
carry out repairs or service work, acquaint themselves with and act
according to the information in the Maintenance Manual and Operator's
Manual.

A near accident is a warning!


An incident is an unforeseen event where neither a person, the
machine, nor property is damaged. However, incidents indicate that
there is a risk of injury and actions must be taken to avoid injury risks.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:4 B Safety – Safety instructions

Safety instructions
General
Read, consider and follow the safety instructions below before starting
to work in the machine:
• Service position, page B:4
• Hydraulic system, depressurising, page B:5
• Oils, page B:6
• Fuel system, page B:7
• AdBlue, page B:8
• Clothing, etc., page B:9
• Several mechanics on the same machine, page B:9
• Working under machine, page B:9
• Lifting heavy components, page B:10
• Vibrations, page B:10
• Noise, page B:10
• Solvents, page B:11
• Fire and explosion risks, page B:12
• Fluid or gas under pressure, page B:14
• Coolant, page B:14
• Refrigerant, page B:15
• Air pollution, page B:15
• Tensioned springs, page B:16
• Electric motors, page B:16
• Rotating components and tools, page B:16
• Tyres and rims, page B:17
• Lifting equipment, page B:17
• Spare parts, page B:18
• Non-ionised radiation, page B:19

Service position
General
General

Service position is used for service, maintenance and other situations


when the machine needs to be secured.

Service position means:


• Machine parked, that is, applied parking brake.
• Trolley and attachment in completely lowered position.
• Engine off.
• System voltage off (with battery disconnector).
009797

Machine with trolley and attachment in completely


lowered position

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:5

Hydraulic system, depressurising


1 Machine in service position, see Service position, page B:4.

2 Depressurise the hydraulic system.


Turn on the system voltage and turn the start key to position I.
Repeatedly activate the load handling functions.
3 Turn the start key to position 0 and turn off the system voltage.

009798

4 Depressurise the brake system by opening the drain valve on the


accumulator charging valve.

NOTE
Keep the accumulator drain valve open as long as work is in
progress.

NOTE
After the work has been finished, close the drain valve and
tighten the lock ring.
005648

5 Depressurise the attachment.


Open relief valve top lift.

CAUTION
Hydraulic oil may be directed the wrong way.
Risk of damage to fine filter hydraulic oil.
Check that relief valve attachment is closed before the
engine is started.
009961

The figure above shows open valve.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:6 B Safety – Safety instructions

Oils
The following safety instructions shall be followed for work when
handling oils.

WARNING
Warm and pressurised oil.
Always completely depressurise the hydraulic and
brake systems before starting to work in these systems.
Hydraulic and brake systems are pressurised and the
oil can cause personal injuries.
Avoid skin contact with the oil, use protective gloves.
Hot oil may cause burns, rashes and irritation! Oil may
also be corrosive to mucous membranes in, e.g., eyes,
skin, and throat.

IMPORTANT
Always clean the area around components and
connections before loosening them. Dirt in oil systems
causes increased wear, which results in material
damage.
Always take actions to avoid spills. Where a container
cannot be used for draining, use a pump or hose for
safe handling.
Always check that plugs seal tight before collection
containers are moved.
Handle all oil as environmentally hazardous waste.
Oils freely released cause damage to the environment
and may also start fires. Waste oils/fluids shall always
be handled and taken care of by companies that are
authorised for this work.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:7

Fuel system
The following safety instructions shall be followed for work when
handling fuel.

DANGER
Pay attention to the risk of fire when working on the
fuel system.
Work on the fuel system shall be avoided when the
engine is warm since fuel can spill on hot surfaces and
may ignite.
Ensure that naked flames, sparks or red-hot/glowing
objects have been extinguished before starting work
on or in the vicinity of the fuel system.
Do not smoke in the vicinity of the machine when work
on the fuel system is in progress.

WARNING
The engine's fuel system operates at very high
pressure. The pressure is so high that the jet can
damage the skin, which results in serious injuries.
Risk of personal injury.
Use protective gloves and protective safety goggles,
avoid skin contact with fuel. If a component is to be
loosened, hold a rag over the coupling as protection
and collect the fuel. Fuel may be corrosive to mucous
membranes in, e.g., eyes, skin, and throat.

CAUTION
Always clean the area around components and
connections before loosening them. Dirt in the fuel
system can cause malfunctions and engine stops in
unwanted situations, as well as increased wear and
material damages.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:8 B Safety – Safety instructions

IMPORTANT
Always take actions to avoid spills. Where a container
cannot be used for draining, use a pump or hose for
safe handling.
Always check that plugs and connections seal tight
before moving collection containers.
Handle the fuel as environmentally hazardous waste.
Fuel freely released causes damage to the environment
and may also start fires. Fuel shall always be handled
and taken care of by companies that are authorised for
this work.

AdBlue
The following safety instructions shall be followed for work when
handling AdBlue.

CAUTION
AdBlue can irritate the skin and eyes and when inhaled.
Health hazard!
Handle with care and avoid contact with skin, use
gloves. In the event of contact with skin and spillages
on clothing, rinse the skin with large amounts of water
and replace contaminated clothing and gloves. In
the event of contact with eyes, rinse thoroughly with
water for several minutes and seek medical advice if
necessary. In the event of inhalation, breath fresh air
and seek medical advice if necessary.

CAUTION
AdBlue spilled onto hot components evaporates
quickly.
Irritation of eyes and respiratory system.
Turn your face away. Evaporated AdBlue can harm
mucus membranes in, for example, the eyes and throat.
In the event of contact with eyes, rinse thoroughly with
water for several minutes and seek medical advice if
necessary. In the event of inhalation, breath fresh air
and seek medical advice if necessary.

IMPORTANT
Avoid spilling AdBlue on the ground and in
watercourses.
Spillages on the ground must be absorbed with sand or
other absorbent, non-combustible material.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:9

Clothing, etc.
Clothes should be in good repair. Remove loose, hanging items (e.g.,
tie, scarf). Do not wear clothes with wide sleeves, pant legs, etc.

Remove jewellery as it may conduct electricity and get caught in


moving parts.

Long hair should be put up securely since it may otherwise get caught
in moving parts. Be careful when working with a welder or open flame
since hair is flammable.

Several mechanics on the same machine

WARNING
If several mechanics are working on the same vehicle,
be extra careful so that accidental movements do not
injure another person. Communicate so that everyone
knows where everyone is and what they are doing.

Risks
Work with wheels or axle suspension, mountings, etc., may result in
components on the other side moving and causing damage or injury.

Movements performed from the operator's station, e.g., all movement


of lifting equipment, may cause severe personal injuries.
Safety actions
• Make sure that the machine's lifting equipment is completely
lowered or secured in another way.
• Move the battery disconnector to position zero and remove the key.
• Be aware of the risks when several persons work around the
vehicle.
• Make your co-workers aware of what you're working with.
• Do not work with drive wheels on the machine's both sides at the
same time.

Working under machine

Working under frame

A raised vehicle may not, for any reason, be supported or lifted in parts
that belong to the wheel suspension or steering. Always support under
the frame or wheel axle.
Risks
Mechanical or hydraulic tools and lifting devices can fall over or
accidentally be lowered due to malfunctions or incorrect use.
Safety actions
• Use axle stands and supports that stand securely.
• Lifting tools should be inspected and type approved for use.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:10 B Safety – Safety instructions

Lifting heavy components

WARNING
Careless handling of heavy components may lead to
serious personal injury and material damage.
Use type approved lifting tools or other devices to
move heavy components. Make sure that the device
is sturdy and intact.

Risks

Unsuitable lift slings, straps, etc. may break or slide.

The centre of gravity of the component can change during the course of
the work, and the component may then make unexpected movements
which may cause severe personal injuries and material damage.

A component lifted with lifting equipment can start to turn if the centre
of gravity changes.

A component lifted using an overhead crane may start to swing


back and forth, which can cause severe crushing injuries or material
damage.

Safety actions

Lift with lifting device. Use lifting tools or other devices, especially
when such items are available for certain jobs. See the workshop
manual for methods.

If lifting must be performed without lifting device:


• Lift near the body.
• Keep your back vertical. Raise and lower with your legs and arms,
do not bend your back. Do not twist your body while lifting. Ask for
assistance - before lifting.
• Wear gloves. They're often good protection to reduce crushing
and cutting injuries to fingers.
• Always use protective shoes.

Vibrations
Use of vibrating tools, e.g. impact nut runner or grinder, for an extended
period of time may cause injuries as vibration is transmitted from tool
to hands. Most of all when fingers are cold.

Safety actions
• Use heavy gloves to protect against the cold and transfer of
vibrations.
• Switch between work duties to give the body time to rest.
• Vary work position and grip so that the body is not stressed in only
one position by the vibrations.

Noise
Noise louder than 85 dB (A) lasting for longer than 8 hours is deemed to
damage hearing. (Limit values may differ between different countries.)
High tones (high frequency) is more damaging than low tones at the
same sound level. Noise in the form of impulse sounds may also be
damaging, e.g., hammer blows.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:11

Risks

Hearing damage may occur at noise levels higher than the limit value.
In severe cases, damage may be permanent.

Safety actions
• Use hearing protection. Make sure that it's tested and protects
against the right noise level.
• Limit noise with noise-absorbing dividers, for example,
noise-absorbing materials in roof and on walls.

Solvents
Fluids that (unlike water) dissolve grease, paint, lacquer, wax, oil,
glue, rubber, etc., are called organic solvents. Examples: Naphtha,
gasoline, thinner, alcohols, diesel, xylene, trichloroethylene, toluene.
Many solvents are flammable.

Risks

Products with solvents give off vapours that may cause dizziness,
headache, and nausea. They may also cause irritation of mucous
membranes in the throat and respiratory tracts.

If dissolvent comes into direct contact with the skin it can dry and crack.
Higher risk of skin allergies. Solvents may also cause injuries if they
penetrate the skin and are absorbed by the blood.

If the body is continuously exposed to solvents, the central nervous


system may be injured. This manifests itself as trouble sleeping,
depressions, nervousness, poor memory, and general tiredness.
Continuous inhalation of gasoline and diesel vapours is suspected
of causing cancer.

Safety actions
• Avoid inhaling solvent fumes by providing good ventilation, or
wearing a fresh-air mask or respiratory device with a suitable filter
for the toxic gases.
• Never leave a solvent container without tight-sealing lid.
• Use solvents with a low content of aromatic compounds. This
reduces the risk of injuries.
• Avoid skin contact.
• Use protective gloves.
• Make sure that work clothes are solvent-resistant.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:12 B Safety – Safety instructions

Fire and explosion risks

DANGER
The operator's safety may not be jeopardised in case
of fire.
If possible, take the following actions at the slightest
sign of fire:
1. Stop the machine and turn the start key to stop
position.
2. Leave the cab.
3. Turn off the system voltage with the battery
disconnector.
4. Call the fire department.
5. Try to put out the fire.
If this is not possible, leave the machine and the
danger area.

DANGER
Smoke from a fire may be very toxic.
Smoke anaesthetises, suffocates, and kills! Smoke
from fires, even small amounts, can damage lungs and
respiratory organs.
Avoid inhaling smoke gases, do not stand in the
smoke. Use breathing protection when putting out a
fire and working with burnt materials.

Examples of flammable and explosive substances are oils, gasoline,


diesel fuel oil, organic solvents (lacquer, plastics, cleaning agents),
rustproofing agents, welding gas, gas for heating (acetylene), high
concentration of dust particles consisting of combustible materials.
Rubber tyres are flammable and cause explosive fires.

Risks

Examples of causes of ignition are welding, cutting with a welding


torch, smoking, sparks from grinding machines, contact between
hot machine parts and flammable materials, heat generation in rag
drenched with oil or paint (linseed oil), and oxygen. Oxygen cylinders,
lines, and valves shall be kept free from oil and grease.

Fumes from, e.g., fuel are heavier than air and may "run" down into a
sloping plane, or down in a grease pit, where welding flames, grinding
sparks or cigarette glow may cause an explosion. Evaporated gasoline
explodes very forcefully.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:13

Special cases

Gas oil with added gasoline has a reduced flash point. Risk of
explosion already at room temperature. Explosion risk for heated gas
oil is higher than for gasoline.

When changing oil in the engine, hydraulic system and transmission,


keep in mind that the oil may be hot and can cause burn injuries.

Welding on or near machine. If diesel and or other oils have leaked out
and been absorbed by rags, absorbent agents, paper or other porous
material, glowing welding sparks can cause ignition and explosive fires.

When a battery is being charged, the battery electrolyte's water is


divided into oxygen and hydrogen gas. This mixture is very explosive.
The risk of explosion is especially high when a booster battery or a
rapid-charge device is used since this increases the risk of sparks.

In today's machines there are a lot of electronics. When welding,


all control units must be unplugged and the electric power must be
turned off with the battery disconnector. Powerful welding currents may
otherwise short-circuit the electronics, destroy expensive equipment,
and may cause an explosion or fire.

Never weld on painted surfaces (remove paint, preferably by blasting at


least 10 cm around the welding or cutting point). Use gloves, breathing
protection, and protective safety glasses. Also, never weld near plastic
or rubber materials without first protecting them from the heat. Paint,
plastic, and rubber generate many substances when heated, and these
may be hazardous to health. Be careful with machines that have been
exposed to intense heat or fire.

Safety actions

DANGER
Remains of fuel, oils, grease, and other flammable
materials on the engine or in the engine compartment
are fire hazards.
Risk of fire!
Remove remains of flammable materials from the
engine compartment as soon as they are discovered,
be extra thorough with hot surfaces such as the
exhaust system, manifold, or turbo. If leaks of oil, fuel,
or coolant are detected, find the cause and solve the
problem before starting the engine.

• Make a habit of performing a visual check of the engine and engine


compartment before starting the engine and after operation, when
the engine has been stopped. This ensures fast detection if
anything abnormal has happened or is about to occur. Pay special
attention to oil, fuel, or coolant leaks, loose bolts, worn or poorly
tensioned drive belts, loose connections, damaged hoses, and
electrical cables. The inspection only takes a few minutes and may
prevent serious problems and expensive repairs.
• Store hazardous substance in approved and sealed container.
• Make sure that there is no ignition source near flammable or
explosive substances.
• Make sure that ventilation is adequate or there is an air extraction
unit when handling flammable substances.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:14 B Safety – Safety instructions

Fluid or gas under pressure


Lines with high pressure may be damaged during work and fluid or
gas may jet out.
There may be high pressure in a line even if the pump has stopped,
therefore gas or fluid may leak out when the connection for the hose
is loosened.
A gas cylinder exposed to outside forces may explode, e.g., if it falls on
a hard surface. Gas may flow out from damaged valves.

Risks
Risk of damage/injuries in connection with work on:
• Hydraulic systems (e.g., working hydraulics and brake system).
• Fuel system.
• Changing tyres.
• Climate control unit (air conditioning).

Safety actions
• Use protective goggles and protective gloves.
• Never work in a pressurised system.
• Never adjust a pressure limiting valve to a higher pressure than
the manufacturer's recommendations.
• A hydraulic hose that swells, e.g., at a connection, shows that it
is about to rupture. Replace it as soon as possible! Check the
connections thoroughly.
• Use fluid when checking for leaks.
• Never blow clothes clean with compressed air.
• Failed pressure accumulators shall first be drained of pressure
and then punctured before being discarded (to avoid risk of
explosion). Carefully drill a hole with 3 mm diameter after draining
the pressure.
• Never feel with your hands to check for any leaks. A fine jet from
a hydraulic hose may have such high pressure that it easily cuts
through, e.g., a hand, causing very severe injuries.

Coolant
The coolant in the machine’s cooling system consists of water,
anti-corrosion compound and anti-freeze fluid, for example, ethylene
glycol.
Coolant must not be drained into the sewer system or directly onto
the ground.

Risks
The cooling system is at high pressure when the engine is warm. Hot
coolant may jet out and cause scalding in case of leaks or when the
cap on the expansion tank (filling point) is opened.
Ingesting ethylene glycol and anti-corrosion compound is dangerous
and hazardous to health.

Safety actions
• Use protective gloves and safety glasses if there is a risk of
splashing or spraying.
• First open the cap for the filling point, to release the high pressure.
Be careful. Hot steam and coolant may jet out.
• If possible, avoid working on the cooling system when the coolant
is hot.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:15

Refrigerant
Refrigerant is used in the machine’s air conditioning system.

Work on the air conditioning system must be performed by


accredited/authorised and trained personnel according to national
legislation and local regulations.

Risks

The air conditioning operates at high pressure. Escaping refrigerant


can cause frostbite injuries.

Refrigerant that is heated (e.g., when repairing leaking climate/AC


system), generates gases that are very dangerous to inhale.

Safety actions
• Follow special instructions and equipment for refrigerant according
to the manual when working on the air conditioning unit. Any
person doing the work must have special accreditation. (Note
national legislation and local regulations!)
• Use protective gloves and safety glasses if there’s a risk of leaks.
• Make sure that heat-producing sources or objects are not close by
(cigarette glow, welding flame).

Air pollution
Air pollution is the pollution in the air around us and that are regarded
as hazardous to health. Certain pollutants are more prevalent in some
environments.

The following health-hazardous air pollution is especially prominent in


workshops:
• Carbon monoxide (fumes) is found in exhaust gases. Odourless
and therefore extremely dangerous.
• Nitrogen oxides (nitrous gases) are present in exhaust fumes.
• Welding smoke especially hazardous to health when welding on
oily surfaces, galvanised or lacquered materials.
• Oil mist for example, when applying anti-corrosion agent.
• Grinding dust and gases generated when grinding and heating
plastics, lacquer, anti-corrosion agents, lubricants, paint, etc.
• Isocyanates are present in certain paints, fillers, adhesives and
foam plastics used on machines.

Risks

Sulphuric acid mist is corrosive and injures the respiratory tracts.


(Generated when heating certain plastics and paints.)

Isocyanates may be released in the form of vapour, dust (or may


be found in aerosol) when cutting, grinding, or welding. May cause
mucous membrane irritation with asthma-like symptoms and impaired
lung function. Even brief exposures to high concentrations may cause
problems with persistent hypersensitivity.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:16 B Safety – Safety instructions

Safety actions
• Make sure of adequate ventilation with fresh air when welding,
battery charging and other work when hazardous gases are
generated.
• Use suitable protective gloves and breathing protection when there
is risk of oil mist. Make sure that the protection is oil-resistant.
• Apply oil-resistant protective lotion to unprotected skin.
• Make sure that an eyewash station is in the immediate vicinity
when working with corrosive substances.
• Avoid unnecessary operation of the machine inside the workshop.
Connect air extraction to the exhaust pipe so that exhausts are led
out from the workshop.

Tensioned springs
Examples of tensioned springs:
1. Torque springs in, e.g., pedals.
2. Return spring (cup springs) in parking brake cylinder.
3. Lock rings
4. Gas springs

Risks

If a tensioned spring releases, it is shot out by the spring force and can
also take adjoining parts with it.

Small springs can cause eye injuries.

Parking brake springs are tensioned with high force and can cause very
severe accidents if they are accidentally released in an uncontrolled
manner.

Gas springs and gas-charged shock absorbers are tensioned with high
force and can cause very severe accidents if they are accidentally
released in an uncontrolled manner.

Safety actions
• Use safety glasses.
• Lock rings should be of a suitable type and in good condition.
• Follow the instructions in this and other manual when performing
maintenance and changing parts and components.
• Always use recommended tools.

Electric motors
Safety actions
Always turn off the battery disconnector when working on electric
motors.

Always block the machine’s wheels, make sure that the parking brake
is activated and that the gear selector is in neutral position before
starting any work on the machine.

Rotating components and tools


Examples of rotating components and tools:
• Cooling fan
• Drive belts
• Propeller shafts
• Drills
• Grinding machines

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:17

Risks

Rotating components, e.g., fans or shafts, can cause severe injuries


if touched.

Drills, lathes, grinders or other machines with rotating parts can cause
severe accidents if clothes or hair get caught and are wound up in
the machine.

Safety actions
• Do not use gloves when working with a drill.
• Remove loose, hanging clothing, scarf or tie.
• Never use clothing with wide sleeves or pant legs.
• Make sure that clothing is intact and in good condition.
• Long hair should be gathered up in a hair-net or similar.
• Remove large or loose hanging jewellery from hands, arms and
neck.

Tyres and rims

DANGER
Tyres are to be considered as pressurised containers.
Handling incorrectly, they are a fatal hazard.
Parts can be thrown with explosive force and may
cause severe injuries.
Never repair damaged tyres, rims, or lock rings. Tyre
changes shall be performed by authorised personnel.

Risks

Dismantling wheels: Tyres, rims, and lock rings may be ejected.

Inflating tyres: Tyres, rims, or lock rings may be ejected.

Safety actions
• Always deflate the tyre before starting to work on the wheel.
• Check that tyres, rims, and lock rings are free from damage. Never
repair damaged rims or lock rings.
• Wheels shall be inflated on the machine or in a protective device,
designed and dimensioned so that it can handle or dissipate a
shock wave from a tyre explosion as well as catch the ejected
parts.
• Use protective screen and safety glasses.

Lifting equipment
When working on the machine in general, and with the machine's lifting
equipment in particular, the greatest care must be taken with regards
to securing the mast, carriage and attachment.

Get into the habit of always keeping the carriage lowered to the lowest
position when working on the machine.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:18 B Safety – Safety instructions

Risks

If the machine's lifting equipment is not lowered or secured, there is a


risk of crushing.

Risk of crushing is extra high when depressurising the hydraulic


system, see Hydraulic system, depressurising, page B:5.

Safety actions

Do not start work until the carriage is fully lowered. If the nature of the
work requires the carriage to be raised, it must be secured in some way.

Spare parts

WARNING
For safety reasons, the following spare parts may only
be replaced by genuine spare parts:
• Brake valve
• Drive axle
• Valve for mini-wheel/joystick control
• Steering valve (Orbitrol)
• Steering valve incl. priority valve
• Steering axle
• Steering cylinder
• Rim
• Mast, carriage
• Lift cylinder incl. load control valve
• Lifting chains
• Chain tightener and shaft
• Lift cylinder
• Valve block lift
• Tilt cylinder
• Twistlock, lifting hook
• Control breaker (for hydraulic function)
• Emergency switch
• Hydraulic cylinder, cab tilt
• Accumulator
• Tilt valve
• Main valve load handling
• Accumulator charging valve
• All control units

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Safety instructions B:19

Non-ionised radiation

WARNING
Extra equipment such as two-way radio, RMI, telephone,
etc. may emit non-ionised radiation.
Risk of interference with active or non-active medical
products.
Use a two-way radio, RMI, telephone, etc., when no
persons with active or non-active medical products
are nearby.

NOTE
When persons with active or non-active medical products are not
nearby, then telephone and two-way radio may be used in the cab.
Equipment should not be used when operating or load handling
since this reduces your concentration as operator.
Cargotec does not assume any responsibility for extra equipment
not installed by Cargotec or according to installation instructions
approved by Cargotec.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:20 B Safety – Environment

Environment
General
Our global environment is significantly affected by the world's
ever-increasing industrialisation. Nature, animals, and humans are
exposed daily to great risks in connection with handling of chemicals in
various forms.

Still there are no environmentally safe chemicals, e.g., oils and


coolants, on the market. Therefore, all who handle, perform service, or
repair machines must use the tools and methods that are necessary to
protect the environment in an environmentally correct way.

By following the simple rules below, you will contribute to protecting


our environment.

Recycling

Well-planned recycling of the machine is the starting point for finishing


the life cycle and making use of materials for re-use in new products.
According to calculations by Cargotec, the machine can be recycled to
more than 90% by weight.

Environmentally hazardous waste

Components such as batteries, oils and other chemicals, and other


materials that may constitute environmentally hazardous waste, must
be handled and taken care of in an environmentally safe and sound
manner.

Discarded batteries contain substances hazardous to personal health


and the environment. Therefore, handle batteries in an environmentally
safe manner and according to national regulations.

Oils and fluids

Oils freely released cause damage to the environment and may also
start fires. When emptying and draining oils or fuel, take actions to
prevent unnecessary spills.

Waste oils and fluids must always be taken care of by an authorised


disposal company.

Pay close attention to oil leaks and other fluid leaks! Take immediate
action to seal any leaks.

Air conditioning system

The refrigerant in the air conditioning unit for the cab contributes to
the greenhouse effect if it escapes into the open air. Special training
is required for all service work on the air conditioning unit. Many
countries also require certification by an authority for such work. When
scrapping an air conditioning unit, the refrigerant shall be taken care
of by a certified company.

Working in a contaminated area

The machine shall be equipped for work within a contaminated area


(polluted environment or health-hazardous area) before starting the
work. Also, special local instructions apply for handling and service
work on such a machine.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


B Safety – Environment B:21

Declarations

The machine does not contain asbestos.

The machine contains lead in batteries and electrical wiring. Some


models have cast lead counterweights.

If the machine is equipped with air conditioning, refrigerant of the type


R134a and an amount between 1-3 kg is used.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


B:22

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C:1

C Preventive maintenance

Contents C Preventive maintenance


Preventive maintenance ................................................................................... C:3
Preventive maintenance, general ................................................................... C:3
Preventive maintenance, work instructions..................................................... C:3
Check and service log..................................................................................... C:4
50h-check ....................................................................................................... C:5
Service schedule............................................................................................. C:7
Washing ........................................................................................................ C:13
Lubrication 500 hours ................................................................................... C:14
Lubrication 1000 hours ................................................................................. C:18
Checking for cracks ..................................................................................... C:23

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:3

C Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance, general
It’s very important that preventive maintenance is performed according
to recommended intervals.

Preventive maintenance should be performed by Cargotec, or by a


service organisation authorised by Cargotec.

CAUTION
Service intervals shall be followed.
This is to maintain the machine's safety and to fulfil
warranty and service agreements!
Use spare parts and fluids approved by Cargotec to
fulfil the warranty.

Preventive maintenance, work instructions

1 For a new machine it is very important to check-tighten the wheel


nuts during the first work week until they are seated properly.
This should be done at an interval of 4–5 operating hours (up to
approx. 40–50 operating hours).

2 For a new machine, perform check actions after 50 operating


hours, see 50h-check, page C:5.
Note completed 50h-check in the service log, see Check and
service log, page C:4.

3 Regular service shall be performed according to service schedule,


see Service schedule, page C:7. The service schedule shall be
followed to ensure high machine reliability and safety.
Note completed service in the service log, see Check and service
log, page C:4.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:4 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Check and service log


Model:
Serial number:

Completed maintenance
Oper-
ating Operating
hours Actions hours Date Signature
50h 50h-check
500h 500h service
1000h 1000 service
1500h 500h service
2000h 2000h service
2500h 500h service
3000h 1000 service
3500h 500h service
4000h 2000h service
4500h 500h service
5000h 1000 service
5500h 500h service
6000h 2000h service
6500h 500h service
7000h 1000 service
7500h 500h service
8000h 2000h service
8500h 500h service
9000h 1000 service
9500h 500h service
10000h 2000h service

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:5

50h-check
On a new machine, the following checks shall be performed after 50
operating hours. The checks are performed to increase reliability and
safety.

1 Engine Reference
Bolted joints, attachments, mountings, hose clamps,
wear and chafing of hoses, cable harnesses, etc.
Sealing check oil, coolant, exhaust system
Fuel prefilter, water draining Section 1 Engine, group 1.2.3 Fuel prefilter
Air filter indicator, check Section 1 Engine, group 1.6.1 Air cleaning system
Air filter main cartridge, inspection
Air filter safety cartridge, inspection
Drive belt tension, checking Section 1 Engine, group 1.7.5 Cooling fan
Coolant level, check Section 1 Engine, group 1.7.7 Coolant
Oil and oil filter, change Section 1 Engine, group 1.8 Lubrication system
Oil pressure
2 Transmission
Leakage check
Oil level, check Section 2 Transmission, group 2.6 Lubrication system
Transmission oil filter, changing Section 2 Transmission, group 2.6 Lubrication system
3 Driveline/Axle
Mounting propeller shaft, check-tightening Section 3 Driveline/Axle, group 3.2 Propeller shaft
Mounting drive axle, inspection Section 3 Driveline/Axle, group 3.3 Drive axle
4 Brakes
Leakage check
Power-assisted brake, function check Section 4 Brakes, group 4.3.4 Accumulator
Parking brake, function check Section 4 Brakes, group 4.5.4 Parking brake unit
5 Steering
No action
6 Suspension
Tyres and rims, check Section 6 Suspension, group 6.3 Tyres and rims
Wheel nuts, check-tightening Section 6 Suspension, group 6.3 Tyres and rims
7 Load handling
Hose connections, check-tightening
Bolted joints, check-tightening
Mast wheel and slide plates, function check
Sensors Check that all sensors are undamaged and free of grease.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:6 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Attachment Check for damage


Lifting chains, checking and adjusting Section 7 Load handling, group 7.2.9 Mast
8 Control system
Check that there are no active error codes Section 8 Control system, group 8.3 Error codes
9 Frame, body, cab and accessories
No action
10 Common hydraulics
Leakage check, check-tightening as required
Oil level, check Section 10 Common hydraulics, group 10.6.8 Hydraulic oil
Fine filter hydraulic oil, changing Section 10 Common hydraulics, group 10.6.9 Fine filter hydraulic
oil
11 Common electrics
Batteries, check Section 11 Common electrics, group 11.3.1 Start battery

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:7

Service schedule
Service shall be performed every 500 operating hours. Actions are
divided into 500h, 1000h and 2000h service.
Actions for 500h service are performed between 1000h and 2000h
service, which means at 500h, 1500h, 2500h, etc.
Actions for 1000h service are performed at odd thousands of operating
hours: 1000h, 3000h, 5000h, etc.
Actions for 2000h service are performed at even thousands of
operating hours: 2000h, 4000h, 6000h, etc.
After service is performed, make a note in the check and service log,
see Check and service log, page C:4.
In the column for service below, the following abbreviations are used:
R = replace
C = check or inspection
L = lubrication
h = operating hours

Object, action Service Comment Reference


500h, 1000h, 2000h,
1500h, 3000h, 4000h,
2500h, 5000h 6000h
etc. etc. etc.
0 complete machine
Checking cleanliness and C C C Check for and remove traces Section B Safety
leakage of combustible materials in the
engine compartment.
Take extra care on hot
surfaces such as exhaust
systems, manifolds or turbo.
If leaks of oil, fuel, or coolant
are detected, find the cause
and solve the problem.
Attachments (stub axles) C C Visual check in connection
with greasing.
Lubrication 500 hours L L L Lubrication 500 hours,
page C:14
Lubrication 1000 hours L L
Checking for cracks C* C* * Check every 4000h or every
year.
1 Engine
Bolted joints, attachments, C C C
mountings, etc.
Fuel tank C Clean if necessary. Section 1 Engine, group
1.2.1 Fuel tank
Fuel prefilter C R R Drain water/impurities. Section 1 Engine, group
1.2.3 Fuel prefilter
Change filter earlier if error
code is displayed.
Fuel filter R R Change filter earlier if error Section 1 Engine, group
code is displayed. 1.2.4 Fuel filter
AdBlue tank C Cleaning Section 1 Engine, group
1.2.12 AdBlue tank
AdBlue filter R Section 1 Engine, group
1.2.13 AdBlue filter

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:8 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Valve clearance C First check after 500 h, then


every 1500 h. NOTE
After engine replacement or Performed by service
engine overhaul check/adjust shop authorised by
after 250 h. Volvo Penta.

Air filter main cartridge C/R C/R C/R Checking indicators, change Section 1 Engine, group
when indicated. 1.6.1 Air cleaning system
Air filter safety cartridge C C/R C/R Changed every other time
main cartridge is changed.
Exhaust system C C C Sealing check Section 1 Engine, group
1.6.3 Exhaust system
Charge-air hoses C C Sealing check Section 1 Engine, group
1.6.4 Intercooler
Radiator C C C External check and cleaning. Section 1 Engine, group
1.7.4 Radiator and
expansion tank
NOTE
Do not use high pressure
wash.

Drive belts C/R C/R R Section 1 Engine, group


1.7.5 Cooling fan
Belt tensioner C
Coolant C C C / R* Level check. Section 1 Engine, group
1.7.7 Coolant
* Change after 5000 h or once
every two years.
For volume and quality, see
section F F Technical data.
Coolant, freezing point C C C For volume and quality, see
section F F Technical data.
Turbo C
NOTE
Injectors C* * Every 3000 h.
Performed by service
shop authorised by
Volvo Penta.

Engine oil R R R For volume and quality, see Section 1 Engine, group
section F F Technical data. 1.8 Lubrication system
Engine oil filter R R R
2 Transmission
Breather filter C C Clean if necessary Section 2 Transmission,
group 2.2 Torque
converter
Transmission oil filter R R The transmission oil should be Section 2 Transmission,
changed every 1,000 hours or group 2.6 Lubrication
1 time/year. system
For volume and quality, see
section F F Technical data.
Transmission oil R R For volume and quality, see
section F F Technical data.
Transmission, calibration C C Calibration of transmission is Section 2 Transmission,
recommended every 1,000 group 2.8 Control system
operating hours. transmission
3 Driveline/Axle
Propeller shaft C C C Bolted joints and universal Section 3 Driveline/Axle,
joint. group 3.2 Propeller shaft

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:9

Drive axle oil R R For volume and quality, see Section 3 Driveline/Axle,
section F F Technical data. group 3.3 Drive axle
Mounting drive axle C C Section 3 Driveline/Axle,
group 3.3 Drive axle
Differential, breather nipple C C Clean if necessary.
4 Brakes
Brake pedal C C Section 4 Brakes, group
4.1.1 Brake pedal
Oil pump brake system C C C Section 4 Brakes, group
4.3.1 Oil pump brake
system
Accumulator C C C Section 4 Brakes, group
4.3.4 Accumulator
Parking brake C/R C/R C/R Check pad thickness, change Section 4 Brakes, group
when needed. 4.5.4 Parking brake unit
Oil filter, brake system R R R Section 4 brakes, group
4.8.12 Oil filter brake
system
5 Steering
Link arms C/L C/L C/L Check bearings. Lubrication 500 hours,
page C:14
Sensor steering wheel C C C Section 5 Steering, group
reading mini-wheel/joystick 5.2.12 Sensor steering
control wheel reading

6 Suspension
Steering axle suspension C C Section 6 Suspension,
group 6.2.1 Steering axle
cradle
Wheel spindle, check C C Clearance in wheel Section 6 Suspension,
suspension shall be checked. group 6.2.2 Wheel spindle
Wheel hub steering axle, C Check bearing pre-load. Section 6 Suspension,
check group 6.2.3 Wheel hub
Tyres and rims C C C Damage, wear and pressure, Section 6 Suspension,
change as needed. group 6.3 Tyres and rims
Wheel nuts C C Check-tightening. Section 6 Suspension,
group 6.3 Tyres and rims
Rim C* * Checking for cracks, every Section 6 Suspension,
2000 h or in connection with group 6.3.2 Rim
tyre changes.
7 Load handling
Servo filter R R R Section 7 Load handling,
group 7.2.2 Servo filter
Lifting chains C C C Check damage, tension chain Section 7 Load handling,
when needed. group 7.2.9 Mast
Mast suspension C C
Slide plates mast C C C
Slide plates in trolley C C Check wear, adjust when Section 7 Load handling,
needed. group 7.2.11 Trolley
Attachment C C Damage.
Slide plates spreader beam C C Check wear, change as Section 7 Load handling,
needed. group 7.5.4 Spreader
beam

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:10 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Tilt cylinder C C C Section 7 Load handling,


group 7.7.7 Tilt cylinder
Twistlocks C/R Check for cracks every other Section 7 Load handling,
year or every 4000 h. group 7.9.1 Twistlocks
Replacement every 10000 h.
Reset the hour counter for
twistlocks after replacement.
Lifting hooks / Lock lugs C/R Check for cracks every other Section 7 Load handling,
year or every 4000 h. group 7.9.2 Lifting hook
Replacement every 10000 h.
Reset the hour counter for the
lifting hook after replacement.
8 Control system
C C C Section 8 Control system,
Service indicator, reset group 8.2.4 Service
indicator
9 Frame, body, cab and accessories
Instruments and controls C C C Checking function.
C C C Checking function. Section 9 Frame,
Air conditioning unit body, cab and
accessories, group 9.4.
Check/performance test
of air conditioning.
Fresh air filter R R R Dependent on external Section 9 Frame, body,
environment, at latest every cab and accessories,
500 h. group 9.4.1 Fresh air filter
C C C Clean when needed. Section 9 Frame, body,
Condenser cab and accessories,
group 9.4.8 Condenser
NOTE
Do not use high pressure
wash.

C/R C/R C/R Checking, change if indication Section 9 Frame, body,


Moisture filter is grey. cab and accessories,
group 9.4.9 Moisture filter
Windshield wipers C C C Incl. washer, top up when
needed.
Lighting and audible signals C C C
Roof window C C Check damage, change when Section 9 Frame, body,
needed. cab, and accessories,
group 9.9.3 Roof window
Cab frame C C Check rust damage,
deformation or cracks.
Doors C C C Section 9 Frame, body,
cab and accessories,
Group 9.10.2 Doors
Cab undercarriage C C Check mountings, isolators Section 9 Frame, body,
and bolted joints. cab and accessories,
group 9.10.3 Cab
undercarriage
C C Section 9 Frame, body,
Cab tilt cab and accessories,
group 9.10.4 Cab tilt
Frame C C Check occurrence of any
deformation and rust damage
as well as cracks in welded
joints.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:11

Counterweights C Check that the counterweights


are positioned properly and
that the mounts and welding
seams are intact and free of
visible cracks.
Check tightening torque of
bolted joints.
C C C Section 9 Frame, body,
Central lubrication cab and accessories,
group 9.14 Central
lubrication
Paint/coatings C C Check the machine's painted
surfaces for stone chips and
scratches.
Safety decals C C C Check that safety decals are See Operator's manual
legible, securely fastened, DCF 80–100, section
and not damaged. Clean dirty 3 Overview, group 3.2
decals and replace decals as Signs
needed.
10 Common hydraulics
Cooler hydraulic oil C C External check and cleaning.

NOTE
Do not use high pressure
wash.

Breather filter hydraulic oil C/R R R Change at indication. Section 10 Common


tank hydraulics, group 10.6.6
Breather filter hydraulic oil
tank
Hydraulic oil filter R R Section 10 Common
hydraulics, group 10.6.7
Hydraulic oil filter
Hydraulic oil R For volume and quality, see Section 10 Common
section F F Technical data. hydraulics, group 10.6.8
Hydraulic oil
Fine filter hydraulic oil R R R Section 10 Common
hydraulics, group 10.6.9
Fine filter hydraulic oil
11 Common electrics
Fuses C C C Check that fuses are intact, Section 11 Common
change if needed. electrics, group 11.2.2
Fuses
Batteries C C C Section 11 Common
electrics, group 11.3.1
Start battery

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:12 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Battery cable C C C Section 11 Common


electrics, group 11.3.1
Start battery
Position sensors C C C Should be free from grease
and dirt, clean as needed.
• Sensor, hydraulic
pressure lift cylinder
• Position sensor mast
• Spreading
• Twistlocks
• Lock lugs
• Contact
• Cab tilt

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:13

Test-run
Test-run the machine and check:
• Instruments
• Brakes
• Gearshifting
• All load handling functions
• Steering
• Any noise
After test-run
Check the following after test-run:
• Sealing (no leakage)
• Fluid levels

Washing

CAUTION
High-pressure washing of sensitive components can
lead to short-circuiting and may cause malfunctions.
Product damage!
Do not use high-pressure washing on cab, radiator,
battery compartment, electric components, control
units, connectors, cable splices, cylinder seals, stub
axles, axle/shaft seals, and chains.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:14 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Lubrication 500 hours

1 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

2 Clean the area around each grease cup before greasing.

3 Lubricate the lubricating points of the machine with lubricating


grease, see section F Technical data.
Also do a visual check of all lubricated mounts.

IMPORTANT
On machines with central lubrication, check that the
central lubrication's lubrication points are lubricated,
see section 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories, group
9.14 Central lubrication.

7
6
9

10 10
4 4
5 5

9
2-3 6 2-3
009129

1 1
Lubrication points, lubricating grease

Pos. Lubrication points Reference


1 Wheel hubs (2 pc) Wheel hub and wheel spindle, page C:15
2 Wheel spindles (4 pc) Wheel hub and wheel spindle, page C:15
3 Link arms (4 pc) Link arms, page C:16
4 Brake pedals (2 pc) Brake pedal, page C:16
5 Hinges doors (x2) and cover lid (x1) Hinge doors and cover lid, page C:16

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:15

6 Mast, mast wheels (4 pc) Mast, page C:17


7 Mast, chain wheels (2 pc)
8 Mast, chains (2 pc)
9 Mast, slide plates (4 pc)
10 Tilt cylinders (4 pc) Tilt cylinder, page C:17

Wheel hub and wheel spindle


4 Lift the right steering wheel with a jack (40 tonne) so that wheel
bearing and wheel spindle are unloaded, do not lift so high that
the wheel hangs freely.
5 Grease the wheel hub until grease comes out at the seal on the
hub's inside.
Lift the seal ring's lip with a small screwdriver to facilitate pressing
out of air. Grease until grease comes out by the seal.

NOTE
Be careful so that the seal is not damaged.
009125

Lubrication point wheel hub

6 Grease the wheel spindle's upper and lower bearings.

1 NOTE
It is important that both upper and lower bearings are greased
separately since grease is not pressed between the bearings.

NOTE
On machines with central lubrication, check that the lubrication
reaches the actual lubrication points, see section 9 Frame,
body, cab and accessories, group 9.14 Central lubrication.
2
7 Lower the wheel.
009126

8 Repeat steps 4 - 7 on the left steering wheel.

Lubrication points wheel spindle


1. Upper lubrication point
2. Lower lubrication point

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:16 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Link arms
1 2 9 Lubricate both link arms' outer and inner bearings with grease.

NOTE
On machines with central lubrication, check that the lubrication
reaches the actual lubrication points, see section 9 Frame,
body, cab and accessories, group 9.14 Central lubrication.

009127
Lubrication points link arm
1. Inner bearing
2. Outer bearing

Brake pedal
10 Lubricate the brake pedal's hinge with grease.
11 Wipe off excess grease.

Lubrication points brake pedal

Hinge doors and cover lid


12 Lift the door slightly and lubricate the hinge.

NOTE
1
Do not lift the door off the hinges.

13 Let the door down and wipe off excess grease.


14 Lift the cover lid slightly and lubricate the hinge.

NOTE
Do not lift the cover lid off the hinges.

15 Let the cover lid down and wipe of excess grease.


014040

2
1. Hinge, door
2. Hinge, cover lid

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:17

1 Mast
16 Start the machine and raise the mast to facilitate access to
2 lubrication points.
17 Turn off the engine.
18 Secure the mast in a way that ensures safety.
3
19 Lubricate the chain wheel, mast wheel, slide plates and the slide
plates' contact surfaces with lubricating grease, see section F
Technical data. For lowered lubrication points, lubricate the mast
wheel and the chain wheel down on the mast .
20 Brush or spray the chains with chain oil. Make sure that the chains
are well lubricated.

3
009130

2
Lubrication points for mast
1. Chain wheel
2. Mast wheel
3. Slide plates.

Tilt cylinder
21 Grease the tilt cylinder axles with lubricating grease.

NOTE
Unload the mast when lubricating.
009128

Lubrication points on the tilt cylinder

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:18 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Lubrication 1000 hours


1 Lower carriage and engage full spreading.

2 Turn off the engine and turn off the main electric power.

3 Clean the area around each grease cup before greasing.

4 Lubricate the machine's lubrication points with Lubricating grease


as shown on the diagrams below, see section F Technical data.
Also do a visual check of all lubricated mounts.

IMPORTANT
On machines with central lubrication, check that the
central lubrication's lubrication points are lubricated,
see section 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories, group
9.14 Central lubrication.

5-12
2 2
3

4
009144

Lubrication points, lubricating grease

Pos. Lubrication points Reference


1 Lubrication 500 hours Lubrication 500 hours, page C:14
2 Universal joints (2 pc) Universal joint, page C:19
3 Trolley, page C:20
Trolley, levelling cylinders (4 pc)
4 Trolley, mast (4 pc)
5 Locking cylinders (2 pc) Side lift attachment with twistlock, page C:21
6 Contact pins (2 pc)
7 Spreading cylinders (4 pc)
8 Side shift cylinders (4 pc)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:19

9 Locking cylinders (4 pc) Side lift attachment with lifting hook, page C:22
10 Lock lug shafts (2 pc)
11 Side shift cylinders (2 pc)
12 Spreading cylinders (4 pc)
13 Electric connectors (not shown on diagram) Electric connectors, page C:23

Lubrication 500 hours


5 Perform lubrication 500 hours, see Lubrication 500 hours, page
C:14

Universal joint
6 Grease universal joints with lubricating grease.

Grease nipple for universal joint, example

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:20 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Trolley
7 Turn off the engine.
8 Secure the trolley in a way that ensures safety.
9 Grease mast wheel and levelling cylinders with lubricating
grease, see section F Technical data.
1

013493

Lubrication points for trolley.


1. Mast wheel

1 2
014808

Lubrication points for trolley with levelling


1. Levelling cylinders
2. Mast wheel

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:21

Side lift attachment with twistlock


10 Grease locking cylinders' mount (position 1) with lubricating
grease.

014714
3

Lubrication points for side lift attachment with twistlock


1. Mounting locking cylinders
2. Contact pins
3. Mounting spreading cylinders
4. Mounting side shift cylinders

11 Grease contact pins (position 2). Check that the sensors are
undamaged and free from grease.

12 Grease the spreading cylinder mounts (position 3) with lubricating


grease.

13 Grease the side shift cylinder mounts (position 4) with lubricating


grease.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:22 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Side lift attachment with lifting hook


14 Grease the lock lug shafts (position 1) with lubricating grease,
check that the sensors are undamaged and free from grease.

1 5

4
4

009376
Lubrication points for side lift attachment with lifting hook

15 Grease locking cylinders' mounts (position 2) with lubricating


grease.

16 Grease side shift cylinders' mounts (position 3) with lubricating


grease.

17 Grease spreading cylinders' mounts (position 4) with lubricating


grease.

18 Grease contact pins (position 5). Check that the sensors are
undamaged and free from grease.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:23

19

On machines with central lubrication, check the grease levels in


the pump units on the frame and attachment.
Top up with lubricating grease if the grease levels in the reservoirs
are below the middle.
Filling takes place through the grease nipples on the pump units.

NOTE
If grease has penetrated out from the safety valve, it means
there is a stop in the system, this means that no points are
greased, see section 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories,
group 9.14 Central lubrication.

Electric connectors
20 Grease electric connectors with electric connector grease.

Pump unit central lubrication, example illustration


1. Filling point
2. Safety valve

Checking for cracks

DANGER
Risk of dropped load.
FATAL DANGER!
Never use a machine with structural damage to the
mast and attachment.

DANGER
Welds in areas of high stress concentration must be
checked in accordance with recommended intervals.
The interval is calculated according to the machine
being used for normal handling and on a level, smooth
ground surface. For other handling or, e. g., rough
surface, the interval should be shortened.
If the welds show signs of cracking, take the machine
out of operation immediately and contact Cargotec
Support.

1 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

2 Clean every weld carefully before inspection.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:24 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

3 Visually inspect for damage and cracks in areas with high stress
concentration, see Checkpoints, page C:26. Check the whole
length of every weld.
Welds where cracks are suspected following visual inspection are
tested with magnetic particle inspection and liquid penetrant if
appropriate in accordance with the following:
a. The magnetic particle method is used to determine if there's a
crack or not, and where it is. See Magnetic particle method,
page C:24.
b. Confirmed cracks are investigated further with penetrating
fluid. See Checking cracks with penetrating fluid, page C:25.

Magnetic particle method


1 Blast the applicable area clean so that it is completely free of
paint residue.
2 Test using magnetic particle inspection and the following
equipment:
• Equipment: Yoke Tiede
005375

• Method:
a Alternating current AC
Rim b Contrast colour
• Checking medium:
a Wet
b Colour (for example, Tiede Ferrolux)
If no cracks are detected with the magnetic particle method,
checking is finished and the applicable area is approved.
If cracks are indicated, the crack should be investigated further
with penetrating fluid.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:25

Checking cracks with penetrating fluid


1 Clean the area with cleaning fluid part no. 923626.0668.
2 Spray penetrating fluid part no. 923626.0669 on the cleaned area
and let dry 10 min.
3 Wash off penetrating fluid with cleaning fluid part no. 923626.0668.
Thoroughly wipe off the cleaning fluid with a drying cloth and let

005376
any remaining cleaning fluid evaporate.
4 Spray detection fluid part no. 923626.0670 on the area.
Rim
5 Let the sprayed area dry 1-2 hours.

6 Visually inspect the area.


1 2
If the tested area does not show signs of linear or point-shaped
cracks, it is approved.
If the crack check indicates linear or point-shaped cracks, contact
Cargotec Support.
001705

Examples of cracks
1. Linear crack
2. Pointed crack

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:26 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Checkpoints
1 Check the following welds carefully:

7
8

009660
1 9
Checking for cracks

Pos. Checkpoint Reference


1 Steering axle mounts Steering axle mounts, page C:27
2 Tilt cylinder and tilt cylinder mount. Tilt cylinder and tilt cylinder mount., page C:27
3 Mast Mast, page C:28
4 Mounting of frame beam to back piece Mounting of frame beam to back piece, page C:28
5 Drive axle mount Drive axle mount, page C:28
6 Mast mount Mast mount, page C:29
7 Side lift attachment Side lift attachment, page C:30
8 Trolley Trolley, page C:31
9 Lift cylinder bracket Lift cylinder bracket, page C:33

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:27

Steering axle mounts


2
a) Steering axle mount in chassis
b) Steering axle mount in steering axle cradle

009664

Tilt cylinder and tilt cylinder mount.


3
a) Check the tilt cylinder.
b) Tilt mount in mast.
009662

c) Tilt mount in frame.


009663

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:28 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Mast
4
a) Horizontal support beams in mast.

009666

b) Weld between horizontal and vertical mast beam.


009667

Mounting of frame beam to back piece


5 Mounting of frame beam to back piece.
009672

Drive axle mount


6 Drive axle mount in frame
009668

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:29

Mast mount
7
a) Mast mount in frame

009669
b) Welds between mast beam and mount tab.

009670

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:30 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Side lift attachment


8 Check the side lift attachment's welding seams. Pay particular
attention to the grey-marked areas in accordance with the
illustration. Check the welds at the arrows around the whole beam.

NOTE
There may be other variants of the side lift attachment than the
one shown here.

Side lift attachment with twistlock

Side lift attachment with lifting hook

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:31

Trolley
9 a. Check the trolley's welding seams. Pay particular attention to
the grey-marked areas in accordance with the illustration.
b. Check the wheel pin welds in the trolley.
Check the inner mast wheel pins as well.

014839

Trolley

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:32 C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance

Trolley with levelling


10 a. Check the trolley's welding seams. Pay particular attention to
the grey-marked areas in accordance with the illustration.
b. Check the wheel pin welds in the trolley.
Check the inner mast wheel pins as well.

014728

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


C Preventive maintenance – Preventive maintenance C:33

Lift cylinder bracket


11 Lift cylinders' lower support mount against mast beam.

009661

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


C:34

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


0:1

0 Complete machine

Contents 0 Complete machine


Complete machine..............................................................................................0:3

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


0:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


0 Complete machine – Complete machine 0:3

0 Complete machine
Complete machine, description
Kalmar DCF80-100 is a machine with mast for handling empty
containers. The machine has a lift capacity of 8-10 tonnes depending
on version.

The engine is a straight six-cylinder, four-stroke, turbocharged


low-emission diesel engine with a unit injector, air to air intercooling
and electronically controlled fuel injection.

The transmission is hydro-mechanical with gears in constant mesh


and it has three gears in each direction. The engine's power is
transmitted using a torque converter.

The power transmission consists of propeller shaft and a rigid drive


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 axle with differential and hub reduction. The machine has front-wheel
drive.

The service brake is of the type disc brake in oil, which is integrated
with the driving wheels' wheel hubs. The parking brake is of the disc
brake type and acts on the drive axle's input shaft.

The machine is steered with the rear wheels using a double-acting


hydraulic cylinder. The steering axle is oscillation-mounted in the
frame.

The wheels are mounted on the hubs with nuts and clamps. The drive
axle has twin wheels, the steering axle has single wheels.

Load handling consists of components and functions for handling


loads. Loads are lifted with a side lift attachment secured to a trolley
009775

that is fitted on a mast. Load handling is divided into the functions


lifting/lowering, tilt, side shift, spreading, levelling and load carrying.
1. Counterweight Lifting/lowering is the function for lifting and lowering the trolley. Side
shift is moving the side lift attachment laterally along the trolley.
2. Steering axle Spreading is adjusting the width between Twistlock or Lifting hooks on
3. Cab the side lift attachment. Tilt is for angling the load in the longitudinal
4. Hydraulic oil tank direction of the truck using the mast. Levelling is angling the side lift
attachment in the lateral direction of the truck. Load carrying is the
5. Drive axle locking of the load to the side lift attachment.
6. Tilt cylinder
The control system includes functions to warn the operator of
7. Trolley dangerous situations and faults. The control system has diagnostic
8. Mast options that facilitate troubleshooting.
9. Side lift attachment
The frame supports the machine. The engine, transmission, drive
axle, and steering axle are installed in the frame. On the sides of the
frame are tanks for fuel and hydraulic oil. The cab is located on the
rear section of the frame. As an option the cab can be tilted.

The hydraulic system is supplied by four hydraulic oil pumps, the


pumps are assembled into two pump banks which are fitted on the
transmission's power take-off. Three variable pumps supply load
handling, steering and other hydraulic functions. A fixed pump
supplies the brake system's brake and cooling circuit over an
accumulator charging valve. The hydraulic oil tank is fitted on the
right-hand side of the machine. The hydraulic oil filters are return
filters that are fitted in the hydraulic oil tank.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


0:4 0 Complete machine – Complete machine

The machine's electrical system is built up around control units at


strategic locations on the machine. The control units receive signals
from sensors and contacts and they control components in the vicinity
of each respective control unit. The control units have redundant
voltage feed and communicate via redundant CAN bus. Engine
and transmission have their own control units from their respective
suppliers. These control units communicate via CAN bus with a control
unit in the cab.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1:1

1 Engine

Contents 1 Engine
1 Engine..................................................................................................................1:3
1.2 Fuel system......................................................................................................1:8
1.2.1 Fuel tank .....................................................................................................1:9
1.2.3 Fuel prefilter ..............................................................................................1:10
1.2.4 Fuel filter ...................................................................................................1:12
1.2.12 AdBlue tank ...............................................................................................1:13
1.2.13 AdBlue filter ...............................................................................................1:15
1.6 Air intake and exhaust outlet..........................................................................1:18
1.6.1 Air cleaning system ...................................................................................1:20
1.6.3 Exhaust system .........................................................................................1:22
1.6.4 Intercooler .................................................................................................1:22
1.7 Cooling system ..............................................................................................1:24
1.7.4 Radiator and expansion tank ....................................................................1:24
1.7.5 Cooling fan ................................................................................................1:24
1.7.7 Coolant ......................................................................................................1:26
1.8 Lubrication system .........................................................................................1:31
1.9 Control system engine ...................................................................................1:34
1.10 Ignition/heating...............................................................................................1:35
1.11 Start/stop........................................................................................................1:36

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Engine 1:3

1 Engine
Engine, description
The engine provides power for propulsion and the working hydraulics.

The engines are low emission engines and meet emission regulations
from the USA (California) and Europe. The new engines provide
considerable improvement, not only for exhaust emissions but also
for the power and torque curve.

The machine is equipped with Volvo TAD762VE.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:4 1 Engine – Engine

Engine, function description


Volvo TAD762VE is a straight 6-cylinder, 4-stroke turbocharged
low-emission diesel engine with unit injectors and air-to-air intercooler.

°C

. bar

0 rpm
P I kph

II

III D5
1, 5
7 <°
D
D
D

3 15 8 2
D794 UDS D790-1 D790-2
14 D
D793 D797-1 D795
12 10
D
D
D

D D
17

SENSORS H2O M M
13 4 18 19 11
6 9 5 16

014285
1. Ignition (S150) 11. Sensor fuel level (B757)
2. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 12. Control unit frame (D797-1)
3. Control unit engine (D794) 13. Sensor output shaft speed (B758)
4. Glow plug (E800-1) 14. Control unit, transmission (D793)
5. Starter motor (M654) 15. Control unit SCR (UDS)
6. Engine sensor 16. Pump unit AdBlue
7. Accelerator pedal (B690) 17. Water valve
8. Control unit cab (D790-1) 18. Level and temperature sensor AdBlue
9. Make-contact (closing switch) coolant level (B759) 19. Sensor exhaust temperature
10. Control unit KID (D795)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Engine 1:5

Engine, component location

7
6
5
4
3
8
2
9
1

10

11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

014546
22 21
Volvo TAD762VE, left side (in the machine's direction of travel)
1. Sensor flywheel speed 12. Fuel pump
2. Crankcase ventilation 13. Oil filter
3. Filling point engine oil 14. Sensor oil pressure
4. Injector and preheating (6 pcs.) 15. Fuel filter
5. Dipstick 16. Control unit engine (D794)
6. Preheating of air after intercooler 17. Sensor fuel pressure
7. Sensor coolant level (B757) 18. Oil plug
8. Sensor coolant temperature 19. Fuel prefilter
9. Thermostat housing 20. Sensor water-in-fuel
10. Alternator 21. Water trap
11. Water pump 22. Sensor camshaft speed

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:6 1 Engine – Engine

4
3
2
5
1

11

10

014547
9
8
Volvo TAD762VE, right side (in the machine's direction of travel)
1. Expansion tank 7. Starter motor
2. Filling point coolant 8. Intercooler
3. Connection cab heat 9. Condenser
4. Sensor boost pressure and temperature 10. Transmission oil cooler
5. Sensor fuel pressure (fuel distribution pipe) 11. Radiator engine
6. Turbo

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Engine 1:7

0
P I
4
2 II 3 5
III

6
11

9
10 7
8

014715
Electric components machine
1. Accelerator pedal (B690) 7. Control unit, transmission (D793)
2. Ignition (S150) 8. Fuel tank
3. Control unit, cab KIT (D790-2) 9. Sensor fuel level (B757)
4. Control unit KID (D795) 10. Control unit frame (D797-1)
5. Control unit cab (D790-1) 11. Control unit frame option (D797-2)
6. Control unit engine alternative (D794)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:8 1 Engine – Fuel system

1.2 Fuel system


Fuel system, description
The fuel tank is located on the left-hand side of the machine and is
equipped with a sensor for the fuel level. The amount of fuel in the
tank is shown on an operating menu on the display in the cab. Fuel
prefilter with water trap and fuel filter are on the engine. The water trap
is equipped with electrical indication, an event menu appears on the
display when the water trap must be emptied of water.

For component locations see, see Engine, component location, page


1:5.

WARNING
The engine's fuel system operates at very high
pressure. The pressure is so high that the jet can
damage the skin, which results in serious injuries.
Risk of personal injury.
Use protective gloves and protective safety goggles,
avoid skin contact with fuel. If a component is to be
loosened, hold a rag over the coupling as protection
and collect the fuel. Fuel may be corrosive to mucous
membranes in, e.g., eyes, skin, and throat.

Fuel system, bleeding

NOTE
Read safety recommendations for fuel system before starting work,
see section B Safety.

The fuel system must be bled after fuel filter replacement, if the fuel
tank has been run dry or after long periods of operation for example.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Fuel tank 1:9

1 1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.


2 Open the hand pump (position 1) by pressing it in and turning
anticlockwise.
3 Bleed the fuel system by pumping the hand pump at least 250
times.
Pump quickly to maintain the pressure in the pump.

NOTE
Bleeding is not complete until there is no resistance in the pump.

4 Close the hand pump by pressing in and turning clockwise.


5 Start the engine and allow it to idle for about five minutes before
increasing speed.

014097

1. Hand pump

1.2.1 Fuel tank

Fuel tank, cleaning

NOTE
Read safety recommendations for fuel system before starting work,
see section B Safety.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.


2 Empty the fuel tank of fuel. Use a pumping device.
3 Remove the drain plug from the fuel tank.
4 Rinse the fuel tank clean through the fuel filler hole.
5 Reinstall the drain plug.

3
1
014209

1. Fuel filler
2. Drain plug, under tank
3. Fuel tank

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:10 1 Engine – Fuel prefilter

1.2.3 Fuel prefilter

Fuel prefilter, draining condensation

NOTE
Read safety recommendations for fuel system before starting work,
see section B Safety.

NOTE
Water traps must be emptied of water as necessary or at least every
50 operating hours.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Close the fuel cock.

3 Place a container under the fuel prefilter.

4 Open the drain cock (position 1) on the underneath and allow the
condensation water to run out. Close the cock when clean fuel
without water runs out.
5 Remove the water trap (position 2) from the fuel filter by turning it
clockwise.
6 Clean the water trap and refit it on the filter cartridge.
7 Close the drain cock and open the fuel cock.
8 Bleed the fuel system, see Fuel system, bleeding, page 1:8.
9 Turn on the system voltage and start the engine. Check that the
filter seals tight.

1
014216

1. Drain cock
2. Water trap

Fuel prefilter, replacement

NOTE
Read safety recommendations for fuel system before starting work,
see section B Safety.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Clean the fuel prefilter and water trap.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Fuel prefilter 1:11

3 Drain the fuel prefilter of fuel and water.


See Fuel prefilter, draining condensation, page 1:10.
4 Remove the water trap (position 3) from the old filter.
5 Remove the fuel filter (position 2) from the filter holder, use a filter
tool. Collect any fuel in a container.

3
014214

1. Wiring
2. Fuel prefilter
3. Water trap

6 Lubricate the gasket on the new fuel filter.


7 Install the new fuel prefilter on the filter holder.
Tighten in accordance with the instructions on the filter.
8 Install a new O-ring on the water trap and lubricate with diesel oil.
Install the water trap on the new fuel prefilter.
9 Bleed the fuel system, see Fuel system, bleeding, page 1:8.
10 Turn on the system voltage and start the engine. Check that the
filter seals tight.
2

3
014215

1. Wiring
2. Fuel prefilter
3. Water trap

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:12 1 Engine – Fuel filter

1.2.4 Fuel filter

Fuel filter, replacement

NOTE
Read safety recommendations for fuel system before starting work,
see section B Safety.

NOTE
Do not fill the fuel filter with fuel prior to installation. There is a risk
of contaminants entering the fuel system and causing malfunctions
or damage.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

NOTE
The fuel filter is self-draining. Wait a few seconds after the engine
has been switched off before removing the filter cover and filter
insert.

2 Clean around the filter.


3 Remove the filter cover (position 1).

1 4 Remove the O-ring (position 2) and filter insert (position 3).


5 Fit a new filter insert and new O-ring.
6 Fit the filter cover, tighten to a torque of 25 Nm
2 7 Bleed the fuel system, see Fuel system, bleeding, page 1:8.
8 Start the engine and check sealing.

3
014217

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – AdBlue tank 1:13

1.2.12 AdBlue tank

AdBlue tank, cleaning

NOTE
Read safety recommendations for AdBlue before starting work, see
section B Safety.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Remove the drain plug (position 1) on the underside of the AdBlue


tank. Drain any remaining AdBlue into a container.
3 Replace the drain plug gasket and reinstall the plug, tighten to
a tightening torque of 30 Nm.

NOTE
Only use gaskets that can withstand AdBlue.

1
014224

4 Remove the filler cap and filler pipe.


014225

5 Lower the filler cap and filler pipe in a water bath. Let them remain
for at least two minutes.
014226

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:14 1 Engine – AdBlue tank

6 Detach and remove the tank connections.

014227

7 Check the strainer on the connections. Clean when needed.

NOTE
Always replace a damaged strainer.
014228

8 Flush the tank with hot water for at least ten minutes.
Then check that the tank is completely drained of water.
014229

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – AdBlue filter 1:15

9 Reinstall the tank connections.

014230
10 Reinstall the filler pipe.
11 Fill the tank with AdBlue. Refit the filler cap.
014231

1.2.13 AdBlue filter

AdBlue filter, replacement

NOTE
Read safety recommendations for AdBlue before starting work, see
section B Safety.

CAUTION
Wait at least two minutes after switching the engine off
before removing the hoses for AdBlue so that the SCR
system has time to drain and depressurise.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Remove the plate covering the pump unit from below. The plate is
placed under the battery compartment on the machine's left-hand
side.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:16 1 Engine – AdBlue filter

3 Remove the connection for the heating element.

NOTE
Pull the connection straight out.

014232

4 Drain any remaining AdBlue into a container.


Place a container under the pump unit. Connect a plastic tube to
the drain screw located on the filter holder. Open the screw and
allow the remaining AdBlue solution to run down into the container.
014233

5 Remove the hose from the filter holder by pressing in the catches.
014234

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – AdBlue filter 1:17

6 Remove the filter holder (position 1) from the pump unit. Remove
the filter insert (position 3).

NOTE
If the filter has been detached, it must be removed completely
before being reinstalled, even if it is to be reused.

7 Install a new O-ring (position 2) in the new filter holder.


Install a new filter insert in the filter holder.
Install the filter insert and filter holder as one unit in the pump.
Tighten the filter holder using a toque wrench.
3
NOTE
2 Check that the drain valve is closed.

014235 8 Install the hose to the filter holder. Check that the locks lock
1 securely.

9 Reconnect the connection to the heating element. Check that


the connection locks securely.

NOTE
Ensure that the connection is connected straight.

10 Start the engine and check sealing.


014236

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:18 1 Engine – Air intake and exhaust outlet

1.6 Air intake and exhaust outlet


Air intake and exhaust outlet, description
There is an air cleaner on the machine. The air cleaner is equipped
with an indicator that indicates when the air filter needs replacing. The
air cleaner has two filter inserts, one main insert and a safety insert.
The air cleaner is connected to the engine by the turbocharger.

Volvo Stage 3B engines are equipped with SCR technology to reduce


nitrogen oxides (NOx) in exhaust gases. SCR technology means that
AdBlue is injected into the exhaust gases before it reaches the SCR
catalyst. A sensor measures the exhaust gases' NOx levels. The SCR
is located on the left-hand side of the machine.

AdBlue contains deionised water mixed with 32.5% urea. The urea is
broken down into ammonia, which reacts with NOx to create harmless
nitrogen and water vapour.

The exhaust system consists of pipe and silencer.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Air intake and exhaust outlet 1:19

Exhaust outlet, component location

3
2
1

8 6

7
11
10
9

014287
1. Control unit NOx 7. Level and temperature sensor AdBlue
2. Silencer with integrated SCR catalyst 8. Exhaust pipe
3. Catalyst 9. AdBlue tank
4. End-pipe 10. Pump unit
5. Heat shield 11. Heating valve
6. Injector unit

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:20 1 Engine – Air cleaning system

1.6.1 Air cleaning system

Air filter, changing

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Clean the outside of the air filter housing.


3 Remove the cap from the air filter housing.
2
3

1 008040

1. Dust reservoir
2. Air cleaner
3. Indicator air filter

4 Remove the filter insert.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Air cleaning system 1:21

5 Clean the dust reservoir.

6 Check the safety insert, change as needed. (The safety insert


should be changed every other time the filter insert is changed).
7 Fit a new filter insert.

NOTE
The filter insert should be changed, not cleaned.

8 Fit the cover to the air cleaner casing.


9 Check that the hoses from the air filter housing (and other parts)
are intact and sealed.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:22 1 Engine – Exhaust system

10 Reset the indicator.

1.6.3 Exhaust system

Exhaust system, checking

WARNING
Hot exhaust system!
Risk of burn injuries.
Never touch the turbo, exhaust pipe, or muffler when the
machine is in operation or has recently been turned off!

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Check the exhaust system's sealing and other wear.

3 Check that the exhaust system suspension is intact.

1.6.4 Intercooler

Intercooler, checking
1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Clean the intercooler with compressed air.

NOTE
Do not use high pressure wash.

3 Check that the intercooler suspension is intact.

4 Check the sealing and check that the intercooler's hoses and
clamps are in good condition.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Intercooler 1:23

Charge-air pipe, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Check the charge air pipes for visible cracks and other external
damage. If the pipes are damaged or if connections leak, the
boost pressure will be too low and engine power is reduced.

014249

Charge-air pipe, example

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:24 1 Engine – Cooling system

1.7 Cooling system


Cooling system, description
The engine radiator is located together with the intercooler and the
transmission oil cooler in one unit, a cooling unit.

For component locations see, see Engine, component location, page


1:5.

1.7.4 Radiator and expansion tank

Radiator, cleaning

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Clean the radiator with compressed air.

NOTE
Do not use high pressure wash.

3 Check that the cooling flanges are whole.

1.7.5 Cooling fan


Drive belt, inspection
Check after operating when the belts are warm.

It should be possible to press down the drive belt approx. 3-4 cm


between the belt pulleys.

The drive belt has an automatic belt tensioner and does not need to be
adjusted. Check the condition of the belts, replace if necessary, see
Drive belt, replacement, page 1:25.

IMPORTANT
Always change a drive belt that looks to be worn or
has cracks.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Cooling fan 1:25

Drive belt, replacement


1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Loosen the belt tensioner and lock it with a drift (position 1).
3 Remove the belt from the coolant pump (position 2) first.
4 Install the new belt.
Let back the belt tensioner and check that the belt is positioned
correctly in the grooves and is tensioned correctly.

1
014242

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:26 1 Engine – Coolant

1.7.7 Coolant

Coolant level, check

WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised. Steam or hot fluid
may jet out.
Risk of scalding and burn injuries!
Open the filler cap very carefully when the engine is
warm. Wait until the coolant has cooled before topping
up.

Coolant should be filled in the system's expansion tank (position A).


The coolant should be visible in the sight glass (position C) on the
expansion tank.

NOTE
Open very carefully as hot coolant may jet up.

If the coolant level becomes too low, the warning light for low coolant
C B A level (position 40) lights up on the instrument panel.

NOTE
A low coolant level may cause engine damage or may cause the
engine to stop.
014058

A Position for coolant reservoir (expansion tank)


B Filling point
C Sight glass

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Coolant 1:27

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 If needed, top up with ready-mixed recommended coolant. For


volume and quality, see section F F Technical data.

CAUTION
Different types of coolant must not be mixed.
Risk of engine damage and damage to the cooling
system if different types of coolant are mixed.
When changing and topping up coolant, only use
coolant of the same type that was used before.

IMPORTANT
On machines with ECC or AC, it is of the utmost
importance that the engine's cooling system be refilled
with coolant that contains the correct mixture of
anti-freeze fluid; otherwise there is a risk that the air
conditioning will freeze up and fail during use.

Coolant, changing
Radiator performance is reduced due to deposits in the radiator and
radiator ducts. Clean the system in conjunction with changing the
coolant.

WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised. Steam or hot fluid
may jet out.
Risk of scalding and burn injuries!
Open the filler cap very carefully when the engine is
warm. Wait until the coolant has cooled before topping
up.

WARNING
Glycol and anti-corrosion agents are hazardous to
health.
Health hazard!
Handle with care. Avoid contact with skin, use
protective goggles and protective gloves. In the event
of contact with skin, wash the skin.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:28 1 Engine – Coolant

IMPORTANT
Cleaning may not be performed if there can be a risk
of freezing in the cooling system since the cleaning
solution does not have anti-freeze properties.

NOTE
Read safety instructions for coolant before starting work, see section
B Safety.

NOTE
Before draining, stop the engine and remove the filler cap.

Draining
1 Remove the filler cap from the cooling system's expansion tank.

C B A
014058

A Position for coolant reservoir (expansion tank)


B Filling point
C Sight glass

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Coolant 1:29

2 Open all drain points. Drain the coolant from the radiator and
engine block with drain hose. The drain nipples are under the
radiator and on the right-hand side of the engine block.
3 Check that all coolant drains.

NOTE
There may be deposits inside the cock or the plug that must
be cleaned; otherwise there is a risk that coolant may remain
and cause freezing damage.

Check whether the installation has additional cocks or plugs on

007394
the coolant line's lowest points. Allow the drain cocks or plugs to
remain open and ensure that the heating knob is set to full heat
during cleaning.
Drain point engine.
4 Insert a hose in the filler hole in the expansion tank and flush with
clean water, until the draining water is clear.
5 If there still are impurities after flushing for some time, cleaning
with coolant can be performed. Otherwise continue with Filling
point, page 1:30.

Cleaning with coolant


1 Fill the cooling system with 15-20 % concentrated coolant mixture.
Only use recommended concentrated coolant mixed with clean
water.

2 Drain the cooling system after 1-2 days of operation.

NOTE
In order to avoid dissolved materials getting into the cooling
system, drain quickly, within 10 minutes, without the engine
having been stationary for a long time.
Remove the filler cap from the expansion tank and any lower
radiator hose to increase the drain speed.

3 Immediately flush the system thoroughly with clean hot water to


prevent dirt getting on the internal surfaces. Flush until clean water
runs out. Make sure the heat control is at full heat during cleaning.

4 If impurities should remain after a long time of flushing, cleaning


can be performed with radiator cleaning agent and after-treatment
with neutraliser.

NOTE
Use only cleaning agent approved by the engine manufacturer.
Carefully follow the instructions on the packaging.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:30 1 Engine – Coolant

Filling point
1 When the cooling system is completely free from impurities, close
the drain cocks.

CAUTION
Different types of coolant must not be mixed.
Risk of engine damage and damage to the cooling
system if different types of coolant are mixed.
When changing and topping up coolant, only use
coolant of the same type that was used before.

NOTE
Only use recommended coolant.

2 Add coolant so that the level lies between the MIN and MAX
markings. The engine must not be started until the system
has been bled and filled fully.

3 Start the engine when the system is bled and completely filled.
Open any bleeder valves some time after start, so that the trapped
air can escape.
Open all heat controls on the heater unit so that it is bled.

4 Stop the engine after about one hour and check the coolant level,
top up if needed.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Lubrication system 1:31

1.8 Lubrication system


Lubrication system, description
The engine's lubrication system is completely closed and has no
connections to the machine.

For component locations see, see Engine, component location, page


1:5.

Oil and oil filter, change

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

1 Run the engine until warm.

2 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

3 Remove the drain plug from the engine and drain the engine of oil.
4 Place a container under the oil filter.
5 Clean around the oil filter.
014238

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:32 1 Engine – Lubrication system

6 Carefully remove the filter cover (position 1).


1
7 Remove the O-ring (position 2) and filter insert (position 3).

2 Allow the oil to drain from the filter into the container.
8 Fit the new filter insert and a new O-ring.
3
9 Fit the filter cover and tighten to a torque of 40+10 Nm.
10 When the oil has run out fit the oil plug with a new gasket. Tighten
to a maximum torque of 55±10 Nm.

NOTE
Do not tighten the oil plug with higher tightening torque, the
threads will be damaged.

11 Fill with engine oil to the correct level. Do not fill over MAX-level.
For volume and quality, see section F Technical data.
12 Start the engine, let it idle. Check that the oil pressure is normal.
13 Turn off the engine and check the oil level, see Oil level, check,
page 1:32. Top up as needed.
014237

Oil level, check

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

The engine's filler pipe (position B) and dipstick (position C) are under
the engine hood.
1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Lubrication system 1:33

2 Check the oil level when the engine has been warmed up. Wipe
off the dipstick before checking.
The dipstick has two markings, MAX and MIN, and the oil level
should be between them.

NOTE
On certain machines the oil dipstick is long. Wear gloves.

3 Top up with new engine oil if necessary (position B). For volume
and quality, see section F Technical data).
A
4 Fill - wait awhile - check on the dipstick.
C
NOTE
B
Work carefully when filling to prevent other fluids or particles
from contaminating the oil, which means risk of engine damage.

014784

A. Location for filling and dipstick for engine oil


B. Filling
C. Dipstick

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:34 1 Engine – Control system engine

1.9 Control system engine


Control system engine, description
The engine is controlled by a control and monitoring system, for which
the central unit is a control unit.

The control unit controls the amount of fuel to the unit injectors by
opening and closing a fuel valve by each injector. The unit injectors are
activated by an extra cam lobe on the camshaft, which compresses the
injector so that fuel is injected into the cylinder.

The fuel quantity is calculated by the control unit based on signals from
the sensors on the engine and a CAN message about the desired
engine speed (from the accelerator pedal via the cab control unit
(D790-1)).

If serious malfunctions are detected by the control and monitoring


system on the engine, then engine power is limited to protect the
engine from further damage.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


1 Engine – Ignition/heating 1:35

1.10 Ignition/heating
Ignition/heating, description
The engine features preheating of the induction air, for faster start at
low temperatures. Preheating is activated when the ignition key is in
position II. When preheating is activated the preheating indicator light
comes on. The ignition sends signals to Control unit KIT (D790-2)
which sends messages via CAN-bus drivetrain to Control unit engine
(D794).

For component locations see, see Engine, component location, page


1:5.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


1:36 1 Engine – Start/stop

1.11 Start/stop
Start/stop, description
The engine is started and stopped with the ignition. The ignition sends
signals to Control unit KIT (D790-2) and Control unit cab (D790-1)
which sends messages via CAN-bus drivetrain to Control unit engine
(D794). Starter motor and stop device are controlled by Control unit
engine (D794).

Start lock-out is available as an option, where a code has to be


entered via the display before the engine can be started.

Automatic engine shutdown is available as optional equipment.


This means that the engine switches off automatically after 3-30
minutes (depending on customer setup) irrespective of whether the
operator is sitting in the seat or not. The conditions are that the
machine is stationary and idling.

There is a stop button on the engine that can be used to stop the engine
in an emergency, e.g. if the engine cannot be stopped by other means.

For component locations see, see Engine, component location, page


1:5.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2:1

2 Transmission

Contents 2 Transmission
2 Transmission ......................................................................................................2:3
2.2 Torque converter/Clutch system ......................................................................2:7
2.3 Mechanical transmission..................................................................................2:8
2.6 Lubrication system ...........................................................................................2:9
2.7 Cooling system ..............................................................................................2:12
2.8 Control system transmission..........................................................................2:13

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2 Transmission – Transmission 2:3

2 Transmission
Transmission, general information
The transmission converts the engine power to the drive wheels (drive
axle) via the propeller shaft and also power to drive the hydraulic oil
pumps for the hydraulic system and the brake system.

The transmission is fully automatic with torque converter. It has three


forward gears and three reverse gears.

The torque converter and the transmission work together via a common
hydraulic system. The torque converter is a hydraulic clutch located
between the engine's output shaft and the transmission's input shaft.
The hydraulic oil pumps and the oil pump for control and lubrication
of the transmission are connected to the torque converter via power
take-offs on the transmission.

The gear position is selected by modulating pressure via electrical


valves that are controlled by the transmission control unit (D793). The
control unit uses sensors for pressure, temperature, and rpm to decide
which gear position should be activated as well as solenoid valves
to activate the gear.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:4 2 Transmission – Transmission

Transmission, function description


Condition Reference value
Sensor operator in seat Operator in seat

2
F
R

D 1
19 <˚
22 Pa 6 D
D
18 7 3
D794 D790-1 D790-2

D793 D795 D797-1


10 17 21
D

D D
D
D D
9 D
D ˚C Pa
8 12 13 14 15
Pa ˚C 20

5 16

11
4

009640
1. Multi-function lever (S162) 12. Sensor turbine speed (B751)
2. Shifting program selector on Control unit KIT (D790-2) 13. Sensor drum speed (B752)
3. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 14. Sensor output shaft speed (B758)
4. Transmission oil pump 15. Temperature monitor torque converter (S221)
5. Transmission oil filter 16. Oil cooler
6. Accelerator pedal (B690)
17. Control unit KID (D795)
7. Control unit cab (D790-1)
18. Control unit engine (D794)
8. Sensor oil pressure
19. Declutch pedal (S220-1)
9. Sensor engine speed and oil temperature (B758/766)
20. Break contact declutch (S220-2)
10. Control unit, transmission (D793)
21. Control unit frame (D797-1)
11. Solenoid valves for travel direction and gear position
in valve block transmission control 22. Sensor operator in seat (S230)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2 Transmission – Transmission 2:5

Transmission, component location

3 4
14 7
2
1
12
6 13

15
8
16
9
17
10

014736
19 18 11
1. Valve block transmission control 11. Oil filter transmission
2. Connection cooler (out from transmission) 12. Inlet radiator
3. Oil pump transmission 13. Outlet radiator
4. Power take-off 14. Transmission oil cooler
5. Cooling unit 15. Connection cooler (from cooler to sump)
6. Thermostat 16. Temperature monitor torque converter (S221)
7. Breather filter transmission 17. Sensor turbine speed (B751)
8. Sensor drum speed (B752) 18. Sensor output shaft speed (B758)
9. Sensor engine speed and oil temperature (B758/766) 19. Output shaft
10. Sensor oil pressure

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:6 2 Transmission – Transmission

3 4 5
2

11

10 9 8

014041
1. Accelerator pedal (B690) 7. Declutch pedal (S220-1)
2. Multi-function lever (S162) 8. Control unit, transmission (D793)
3. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 9. Control unit engine (D794)
4. Control unit KID (D795) 10. Control unit frame (D797-1)
5. Control unit cab (D790-1) 11. Break contact declutch (S220-2)
6. Sensor operator in seat (S230)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2 Transmission – Torque converter/Clutch system 2:7

2.2 Torque converter/Clutch system


Torque converter/clutch, description
The torque converter transmits the engine's power to the transmission.

Transmission, component location, page 2:5.

Breather filter, cleaning

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Disconnect the breather filter from the transmission.


3 Clean the breather filter from dirt.
4 Reinstall the breather filter.

1. Breather filter, on top of torque converter.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:8 2 Transmission – Mechanical transmission

2.3 Mechanical transmission


Mechanical transmission, description
The transmission is built with all gears in constant mesh. It is shifted
by hydraulic pressurising of clutch discs for each of the gears. The
discs connect the input shaft with the main shaft or tubular shaft,
depending on which gear has been selected. Shifting takes place
without disengaging the transmission from the engine.

The transmission has three gears in each direction. Shifting is


automatically controlled by Control unit, transmission (D793) which
selects gear electrically by activating solenoid valves that control oil
pressure to the different clutches.

The FORWARD and REVERSE clutches are electro-hydraulically


modulated, which means that the clutch pressure is built up gradually.
This allows for switching between FORWARD and REVERSE and vice
versa whilst travelling at a speed that is lower than the set limit.

Modulation also allows for smooth shifts between FORWARD and


REVERSE.

Declutch is controlled with a separate declutch pedal that is activated


at a certain brake pressure.

High modulation (i.e. smooth driving/intensive slippage between gears)


gives high wear on the transmission and high oil temperature. Sensor
for oil temperature gives a warning when the oil is hotter than 100 °C.
If the oil temperature sensor indicates 125 °C the transmission stops
working.

For component locations see Transmission, component location, page


2:5.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2 Transmission – Lubrication system 2:9

2.6 Lubrication system


Lubrication system, description
The transmission has its own lubrication system that is used for
lubrication, control, and cooling of the transmission. The transmission
oil cooler is located at the bottom in the cooling unit behind the
engine, a thermostat in the cooler enables the oil to reach operating
temperature faster.

At high oil temperature (100 ºC) a warning is activated in Control unit


KID (D795) and performance is reduced, if the oil temperature goes
above 125 ºC the transmission declutches.

For component locations see Transmission, component location, page


2:5.

Oil and oil filter transmission, changing

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

NOTE
Do not over-fill the transmission!

1 Operate and warm up the transmission oil.

2 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

3 Place a container under the transmission.

4 Remove the drain plug for transmission oil and let the oil drain
into the receptacle.

NOTE
Make sure that the drain plug's washer seal is also removed.

Draining transmission oil

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:10 2 Transmission – Lubrication system

5 Clean the area around the oil filter.


6 Change oil filter.
Lubricate the O-ring on the new oil filter with transmission oil.
Tighten to contact and then a further two-thirds of a turn.
7 When the transmission oil has drained, fit the drain plug.

NOTE
Make sure that the drain plug's washer seal is also removed.

004331

Oil filter transmission

8 Remove the transmission dipstick and fill new transmission oil


through the dipstick's hole to the low level marking on the dipstick.
For volume and quality, see section F F Technical data.
9 Start the engine and let the engine run at idle for at least two
minutes.
10 Check that the drain plug for transmission oil seals tightly.
11 Check the transmission oil level with the engine running at idle and
top up to the marking for low level.

A
B
008156

A Position for filling and level checking


B Dipstick and filling point

12 Warm up the transmission so that the oil temperature is approx.


60-65 ºC on the display. Use operating menu oil temperature to
check the transmission oil temperature.
a
13 Check the oil level and top up to the MAX marking for oil level.
000356

b 14 Calibrate the transmission, see Transmission, calibration, page


2:14.
Operating menu oil temperature
a Transmission oil temperature
b Hydraulic oil temperature

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2 Transmission – Lubrication system 2:11

Oil level, check

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

The transmission's oil filling pipe and oil dipstick are located under
the hood.
1 Check the oil level with the engine idling, the transmission in
neutral, and at operating temperature (approx. 82-93°C on the
display). The oil dipstick has two markings, MAX and MIN, the oil
level should be at MAX.
Wipe off the dipstick before checking.

NOTE
The oil dipstick is long. Wear gloves.

2 Fill transmission oil (position B) if needed (for volume and grade,


see section F Technical data).
A
Fill – wait awhile – check on the oil dipstick.
B
NOTE
Work carefully when filling transmission oil to prevent other
fluids or particles from contaminating the oil, which means risk
of transmission damage.
008156

A Position for filling and level checking


B Dipstick and filling point

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:12 2 Transmission – Cooling system

2.7 Cooling system


Cooling system, description
The transmission is cooled by the lubrication system see Lubrication
system, description, page 2:9.

For component locations see Transmission, component location, page


2:5.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2 Transmission – Control system transmission 2:13

2.8 Control system transmission


Control system transmission, description
Control unit transmission controls shifting based on signals from
pressure, temperature, and speed (rpm) sensors. Gear selection takes
place by activation of solenoid valves that distribute control pressure in
the transmission, so that the selected gear gives the right speed.

For component locations see Transmission, component location, page


2:5.

In case of serious transmission malfunctions the control unit uses


two modes with reduced functionality to protect the transmission,
Limp-home and Shut-down.

Mode Limp-Home

The display on transmission control unit shows LH.

In case of:
• a malfunction of a control output from the transmission is detected.
• a malfunction connected to a sensor for “engine speed” is detected.
• two of three “vehicle speed” sensors are defective.

In the event that any of the above situations arise the transmission will
be placed in neutral. To be able to continue operation a gear must be
selected with the gear selector.

In this mode the operator can use the transmission's two first gears in
each direction. If the malfunction occurs in a higher gear, the operator
has to downshift manually to first or second gear to continue.

The control unit uses standard values for modulation.

Mode Shutdown

The display on transmission control unit shows "Sd".

The transmission has an integrated secondary solenoid and pressure


sensor that monitor the transmission's internal oil pressure. This
secondary solenoid is handled by the control unit.

When the control unit gives the control signal for “Shutdown”, the oil
pressure drops in all pressure modulators. This takes place in the
event of a serious malfunction.

In this mode the transmission is in permanent neutral position as there


is no oil pressure to enable selection of a gear.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:14 2 Transmission – Control system transmission

Transmission, calibration

DANGER
Do not leave the machine during calibration. The
machine may start to move.

1 Stop the machine on level ground, select neutral, and apply the
parking brake. Let the engine idle.

2 To select the function to calibrate, first navigate to the service


000056 menu. Then press Enter.

3 Enter the code for calibration.


The code is obtained from Cargotec Support.
1 23
4 5 NOTE
000060

The code determines which service menu shall be activated


(Service, Diagnostics, Initiation or Calibration).

4 Select group by scrolling with the arrow keys (1 and 2) and confirm
CALIBRATION DRIVETRAIN with Enter.

SCALE STEERING
DRIVE-TRAIN RETURN
000062

5 Scroll with the arrow keys (1 and 2) and select DRIVETRAIN,


CALIBR DRIVE-TRN 4(4) menu 4.
GEARBOX WARM UP
6 Check that the oil temperature is at least 61 °C.
MODE X
ACTUAL TEMP XXX If the oil temperature is too low go to DRIVETRAIN, menu 4.
000082

TARGET TEMP XXX A. Apply the footbrake so that the machine is stationary.
B. Select travel direction forward and apply full throttle for 20
seconds.
C. Engage neutral position and apply full throttle for 10 seconds,
run the engine at idle speed.
D. Repeat steps B and C until the oil is warm.
Towards the end of heating the engine speed may decrease
because the oil out from the transmission is too hot. If this occurs,
leave the gear in neutral and keep the engine speed at 1200 rpm
for 20 seconds.
When the temperature is correct MODE changes from 0 to 1.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


2 Transmission – Control system transmission 2:15

7 Select DRIVE-TRAIN, menu 3.


CALIBR DRIVE-TRN 3(4) GEARBOX TUNING
CLUTCH TUNING
PHASE X SUB-PH X Description: Calibration of transmission clutches.
CLUTCH X STATUS X

000081
ACTION X XXXXrpm

PHASE: Indicates current phase in the calibration.


0. Pre-filling of clutch.
1. Calibration of clutch.
4. Calibration complete.
5. Calibration incorrect.
6. Calibration paused.
CLUTCH: Indicates which clutch shall be calibrated.
F. Clutch forward.
R. Clutch reverse.
1. Clutch gear 1.
2. Clutch gear 2.
3. Clutch gear 3.
4. Clutch gear 4.
ACTION: Indicates action from mechanics (in case of a
malfunction).
0. No action (normal condition if no
malfunction).
1. Increase throttle application.
2. Reduce throttle application.
3. Select neutral position.
4. Select travel direction forward.
5. Stop the vehicle. (Press the brake if the
machine starts to move.)
6. Warm up the transmission, see step 4.
7. No action, the engine is controlled via the
transmission control unit.
8. Keep the accelerator pedal in its current
position.
9. Check error codes.
10. Apply the parking brake.
SUB-PH: Internal value for sub-phase 1 or 0.
STATUS: Calibration status.
0. Calibration not in progress.
3. Calibration in progress.

8 Check that the gear lever is in neutral position.

9 Start calibration by pressing Enter.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


2:16 2 Transmission – Control system transmission

10 Calibration starts (takes approx. 15 minutes) and engine speed


is raised to approx. 770 rpm.
The transmission will activate different gears during calibration.

NOTE
If the machine starts to move during calibration then use the
footbrake to keep the machine stationary.

IMPORTANT
Calibration can be aborted at any time by selecting
travel direction reverse.

11 When the engine speed decreases to idling and PHASE = 4 then


calibration is complete.

12 Turn off the ignition to store the values.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


3:1

3 Driveline/Axle

Contents 3 Driveline/Axle
3 Driveline/Axle......................................................................................................3:3
3.2 Propeller shaft..................................................................................................3:4
3.3 Drive axle .........................................................................................................3:5

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


3:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


3 Driveline/Axle – Driveline/Axle 3:3

3 Driveline/Axle
Driveline/Axle, description
The machine's power transmission consists of propeller shaft and drive
axle with differential and hub reduction.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


3:4 3 Driveline/Axle – Propeller shaft

3.2 Propeller shaft


Propeller shaft, description
The propeller shaft transmits the engine power from the transmission
to the drive axle.

005193

Propeller shaft, checking


• After 50h:
Check-tighten the retaining bolts at the mountings for the drive
axle and transmission to 98 Nm (oiled bolt).
• After 500h:
Clean.
Check clearance in universal joints.
• After 1000h:
Grease universal joints with universal grease EP2.
Check-tighten the retaining bolts at the mountings for the drive
axle and transmission to 98 Nm (oiled bolt).

Grease nipple for universal joint, example

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


3 Driveline/Axle – Drive axle 3:5

3.3 Drive axle


Drive axle, description
The drive axle transmits the engine power to the wheels. After the
drive axle's input shaft there is a differential that changes the gear ratio,
distributes the power between the right and left drive wheel, and makes
it possible for the drive wheels to have different speeds when cornering.
The half shaft transmits the power from the differential to the wheel
hubs. At the wheel hubs there are hub reductions that change the gear
ratio between wheels and engine to reduce the stress on the half shaft.
1. Hub reduction
1 2 3 4
2. Wheel brake
5 6 3. Drive shaft (internal)
4 3 2 4. Mounting drive axle
1
5. Drive axle housing
6. Differential (internal)
7. Drain point drive axle oil hub reduction
10 8. Filling point and level check drive axle oil hub reduction
004336

9
8 7 9. Filling point and level check drive axle oil differential
10. Drain point drive axle oil differential

Drive axle, checking

1 Check the drive axle's attachment to the frame so that there is no


corrosion on structural elements (e.g., attaching bolts).

2 Check-tighten the drive axle's attaching bolts to 1530 Nm (oiled


bolt).
3 Check-tighten the wheel nuts to 650 Nm (oiled bolt).
4 Check the bolted joint to the parking brake caliper's attaching plate
and brake disc.
5 Check that drive axle seals tight.
6 Check the oil level in drive axle and the hub reductions.
008046

Attaching bolts drive axle

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


3:6 3 Driveline/Axle – Drive axle

Drive axle oil, changing

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

1 Position the machine so that the hub reductions' drain plugs at the
wheels are in the lowest position.
This applies to both drive wheels.
Wheel 1: move forwards or backwards to obtain the correct
position.
Wheel 2: lift the wheel from the ground (raise the machine under
the mast) and rotate the wheel into the correct position. Lower
1 the machine.
2 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.
2 008058

Wheel hub, drive axle


1. Drain plug hub
2. Level and filling plug hub

3 Position a receptacle by each hub. Position a piece of sheet metal


or similar in the wheel rim to lead oil into the receptacle.
4 Remove the drain plugs for the hubs (position 1) on both sides.
Also remove the level and filling plugs for the hubs (position 2) to
facilitate draining.
Both sides shall be drained separately.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


3 Driveline/Axle – Drive axle 3:7

5 Position a receptacle under the differential and remove the drain


1 2 plug (position 3). Also remove the level and filling plug for the
differential (position 2) to facilitate draining.
6 Clean the drive axle's breather while the oil is draining.
7 Install the drain plugs on the hubs and the differential.

004337
3
NOTE
Differential drive axle Check that the seals are intact, clean and in the correct position.
1. Bleeding the drive axle (inside frame)
8 Fill oil in the hubs until the oil level is flush with the filling and level
2. Level and filling plug differential holes. For volume and quality, see section F F Technical data.
3. Drain plug differential
NOTE
The oil is very viscous, fill the oil slowly. Check the level in
stages so that the oil has time to settle.

9 Install the hubs' level and filler plugs.

NOTE
Check that the seals are intact, clean and in the correct position.

10 Fill oil in the differential until the oil level is flush with the filler and
level hole.
11 Install the level and filler plug on the differential.

NOTE
Check that the seal is intact, clean and in the correct position.

12 Turn on the system voltage.


13 Check the oil level in the drive axle after a short test-drive.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


3:8

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4:1

4 Brakes

Contents 4 Brakes
4 Brakes..................................................................................................................4:3
4.1 Controls and instruments .................................................................................4:4
4.1.1 Brake pedal .................................................................................................4:4
4.3 Power-assisted brake system ..........................................................................4:5
4.3.1 Oil pump brake system................................................................................4:7
4.3.4 Accumulator ................................................................................................4:8
4.5 Parking brake system ......................................................................................4:9
4.5.4 Parking brake unit ..................................................................................... 4:11
4.8 Temperature control, cleaning and oil brake system......................................4:14
4.8.12 Oil filter, brake system ...............................................................................4:14

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4 Brakes – Brakes 4:3

4 Brakes
Brakes, general
There are brakes to stop the machine. The brakes act on the drive axle
(steering axle does not have brakes).

The brake system is divided into three functions:


• Power-assisted brake system, function description, page 4:5
• Parking brake system, function description, page 4:9
• Temperature control, cleaning and oil brake system, function
description, page 4:14

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:4 4 Brakes – Controls and instruments

4.1 Controls and instruments


4.1.1 Brake pedal

Brake pedal, checking and adjusting

1 Clean the floor around the brake pedal and check that nothing
blocks movement of the brake pedal.

2 Check that the brake pedal returns all the way and that the
clearance between the brake pedal and brake valve is 1–1.5 mm.
If needed, adjust the brake pedal's stop bolt so that the clearance
becomes correct.
3 Check that the pedal's travel is smooth.

Stop bolt screw for adjusting clearance between brake


pedal and brake valve. (Illustration shows loose brake
pedal.)

4 Grease the pedal hinges with EP2 universal grease.


5 Check that the rubber on the pedal is intact and that the tread
pattern isn't worn out. Change when needed.

Brake pedal lubrication points. (Figure shows


unattached brake pedal)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4 Brakes – Power-assisted brake system 4:5

4.3 Power-assisted brake system


Power-assisted brake system, function
description
The service brake system consists of a hydraulic oil tank, oil pump
brake system, oil filter brake system, accumulator charging valve,
accumulators, brake valve, pressure sensors, brake cylinder and
wheel brake units.

Oil pump brake system pumps oil (from the tank) which is cleaned in
the oil filter. The accumulator charging valve directs pressure to the
accumulators that store the pressure or direct the oil through the wheel
brake for cooling of the brake discs. The brake valve directs pressure
from the accumulators to the brake cylinder. The brake cylinder
compresses the discs in the brake units that brake the machine.
Make-contact (closing switch) brake pressure emits a signal so that the
brake light is switched on when the brake cylinder is pressurised.

When the accumulators are charged, the accumulator charging valve


directs oil through the drive axle's brake units, which cools the brakes
and then returns to the tank.

12 D790-2 5
B
P
T
D 10 D797-1
8 C
Pa
11

C 9 D
D
4 Pa
3
C ACC
7
B
P
6
2

1
009642

B
1. Oil pump brake system 8. Make-contact brake lights (S216)
2. Oil filter, brake system 9. Break contact (opening switch) (S204)
3. Accumulator charging valve 10. Control unit frame (D797-1)
4. Accumulators 11. Brake lights (H411L & H411R)
5. Brake valve 12. Control unit KIT (D 790-2) Warning lamp brake
pressure
6. Brake cylinder
7. Wheel brakes

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:6 4 Brakes – Power-assisted brake system

Power-assisted brake system, component


location

4
1 2
5 6

3 8
9

12

008061
11 10

1. Brake lights (H411L and H411R) 7. Break contact (opening switch) (S204)
2. Control unit KIT (D 790-2) Warning lamp brake 8. Distribution block drive axle
pressure
9. Make-contact brake lights (S216)
3. Brake valve
10. Oil filter, brake system
4. Control unit frame (D797-1)
11. Oil pump brake system
5. Wheel brake
12. Accumulators
6. Accumulator charging valve

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4 Brakes – Oil pump brake system 4:7

4.3.1 Oil pump brake system


Hydraulic oil pump, checking

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

Checking pump pressure


1 Operate and warm up the machine so that the oil in the brake
system reaches operating temperature, at least 50 ºC.

2 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

3 Depressurise the hydraulic system, see section B Safety.

4 Connect a pressure gauge (0–25 MPa) to the measuring outlet for


pump pressure on the accumulator charging valve.
008048 5 Start the engine and let it idle.

Measuring outlet pump pressure

6 Close the drain valve on the accumulator charging valve and


check the pump pressure during charging.
During charging the pressure should increase to 20.5±1.0 MPa
before the accumulator charging valve switches to cooling. The
pressure drops when the accumulator charging valve switches
to cooling.
7 Check the pressure during cooling.
During cooling the pressure should be max. 0.10–0.15 MPa at
max. engine speed.
8 Turn off the engine.
008049

9 Depressurise the hydraulic system, see section B Safety.


10 Remove the pressure gauge and fit the protective cap on the
Close the accumulator charging valve measuring outlet.
11 Close the drain valve on the accumulator charging valve.

NOTE
Check that the accumulator drain valve is completely closed
and tighten the lock ring.

Checking accumulator charging


12 Depressurise the hydraulic system, see section B Safety.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:8 4 Brakes – Accumulator

13 Connect a pressure gauge (0–25 MPa) to the measuring outlet for


accumulator pressure on the accumulator charging valve.
14 Start the engine and let it idle.

008050
Measuring outlet accumulator pressure

15 Close the drain valve on the accumulator charging valve.

NOTE
Check that the accumulator drain valve is completely closed
and tighten the lock ring.

16 Check that the pressure rises slowly to 20.5±1.0 MPa.


17 Brake repeatedly and check at which pressure the accumulator
charging valve switches to charging.
The valve shall switch to cooling at 15.5±0.5 MPa.
008049

18 Depressurise the hydraulic system, see section B Safety.


19 Remove the pressure gauge and fit the protective cap on the
Close the accumulator charging valve
measuring outlet.
20 Close the drain valve on the accumulator charging valve.

NOTE
Check that the accumulator drain valve is completely closed
and tighten the lock ring.

4.3.4 Accumulator

Accumulator, checking

1 Start the engine and let it idle for approx. 1 minute (until the
accumulator charging valve switches to cooling).

2 Turn off the engine and turn the start key to position I.

3 Apply and release the brake several times, and count the number
of times that the brake can be applied before the warning lamp for
low brake pressure is activated.
It should be possible to apply the brake at least 8 times before
the warning lamp is activated.
If the warning light for low brake pressure is activated earlier, one
of the brake system's accumulators is probably defective and
these should therefore be checked further.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4 Brakes – Parking brake system 4:9

4.5 Parking brake system


Parking brake system, function description
The parking brake consists of hydraulic oil tank, oil pump brake system,
oil filter brake system, accumulator charging valve, pressure sensor
and parking brake unit.

Oil pump brake system pumps oil (from the tank) which is cleaned
in the oil filter. The accumulator charging valve directs pressure to
the accumulators that store the pressure. The parking brake unit is
released with pressure from the accumulators by the parking brake
valve in the accumulator charging valve pressurising the parking brake
caliper. Make-contact (closing switch) parking brake emits a signal
so that indicator light parking brake is switched on when the parking
brake is applied.

D
12
5
6 11
D790-1 D790-2

C D797-1
7
D
D
4
8
Pa 10 9
C ACC

3
H
P
T
2

009641
B
1. Oil pump brake system 7. Control unit frame (D797-1)
2. Oil filter, brake system 8. Solenoid valve, parking brake (Y642)
3. Accumulator charging valve 9. Parking brake caliper
4. Accumulators 10. Break-contact parking brake (S200)
5. Switch parking brake (S107) 11. Control unit KIT (D790-2)
6. Control unit cab (D790-1) 12. Indicator light parking brake

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:10 4 Brakes – Parking brake system

Parking brake system, component location

1 4
2 5 6

12

008062
11 10 9 8

1. Control unit cab (D790-1) 7. Break-contact parking brake (S200)


2. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 8. Parking brake disc
3. Switch parking brake (S107) 9. Parking brake caliper
4. Control unit frame (D797-1) 10. Oil filter, brake system
5. Accumulator charging valve 11. Oil pump brake system
6. Solenoid valve parking brake 12. Accumulators

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4 Brakes – Parking brake unit 4:11

4.5.4 Parking brake unit

Parking brake unit, checking and adjusting

DANGER
The machine may start to roll.
Risk of crushing.
Block the wheels so that the machine cannot start to
roll when the parking brake is released.

1 Start the engine and run up hydraulic pressure until the


accumulators are fully charged and the accumulator charging
valve switches to cooling.

2 Turn off the engine and turn the start key to position I.

3 Release the parking brake.

4 Check that the parking brake caliper can move on the bracket.

5 Check that the brake disc is clean from oil and dirt.

6 Remove the cover from the brake caliper.


Check that there is no oil inside the cover.

7 Loosen the lock nut.


8 Adjust the adjustment screw so that the brakes are applied.
9 Turn back the adjusting screw so that the clearance between pad
and disc becomes 0.5±0.1 mm.
10 Tighten the lock nut.

NOTE
To avoid turning the adjustment screw as well, it must be held
still when tightening the lock nut.

11 Refit the cover on the caliper.


12 Check the function of the parking brake.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:12 4 Brakes – Parking brake unit

4.5.4.2 Parking brake pads

Brake pads, changing

DANGER
The machine may start to roll.
Risk of crushing.
Block the wheels so that the machine cannot start to
roll when the parking brake is released.

1 Machine in service position and blocked wheels, see section B


Safety.

2 Remove the cover from the brake caliper.

3 Loosen the lock nut.


4 Loosen the adjusting screw so that the brake pads become loose.
5 Remove the split pin and loosen the nut on the attaching bolt
holding the parking brake caliper.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4 Brakes – Parking brake unit 4:13

6 Pull out the attaching bolt so that the brake pads can be twisted
out and removed.

NOTE
The bolt does not have to be removed.

7 Remove the parking brake pads.


8 Clean the brake disc with methylated spirit.
9 Fit the new parking brake pads.
10 Press back the attaching bolt.
11 Fit the nut and fit a new split pin.
12 Adjust the parking brake, see section 4 Brakes, group 4.5.4
Parking brake unit.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:14 4 Brakes – Temperature control, cleaning and oil brake system

4.8 Temperature control, cleaning


and oil brake system
Temperature control, cleaning and oil brake
system, function description
The wheel brakes are cooled when the hydraulic oil is pumped through
the brake unit.

The temperature control system consists of hydraulic oil tank, oil pump
brake system, oil filter brake system, accumulator charging valve and
wheel brake units.

Oil pump brake system pumps oil (from the tank) which is cleaned in
the oil filter. When the accumulators are charged, the accumulator
charging valve directs oil through the drive axle's brake units, which
cools the brakes and then returns to the tank.

If the temperature in the brake system becomes too high, the machine's
speed is limited to protect the brakes.

C C

4
P T

2 5
3

002611

1. Oil pump brake system 4. Wheel brake


2. Oil filter, brake system 5. Distribution block
3. Accumulator charging valve

Temperature control, cleaning and oil brake


system, control system
See Power-assisted brake system, component location, page 4:6.

4.8.12 Oil filter, brake system

Oil filter brake system, changing

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

IMPORTANT
The filter protects the brake system from impurities. It
is very important that new impurities do not enter the
brake system when changing filter.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


4 Brakes – Oil filter, brake system 4:15

2 Depressurise the hydraulic and brake systems, see section B


Safety.

NOTE
Leave the valves open when changing.

3 Remove the drain plug on the underside of the filter.


Let the oil drain. Wait a while since the oil drains slowly.
4 Remove the filter holder.

NOTE
The filter holder is heavy, loosen it carefully.

5 Remove the filter insert.

008051 NOTE
Note the position of the O-rings.

6 Clean the filter holder.


7 Install the O-rings on the filter insert and filter holder. Lubricate
the O-rings with hydraulic oil.
8 Fit the new filter insert to the filter bracket.
9 Fit the filter holder and the drain plug.
10 Close the valves that were opened to drain the pressure in the
hydraulic system.

NOTE
Check that the accumulator drain valve is completely closed
and tighten the lock ring.

11 Start the engine and check that the filter holder does not leak.
12 Fit the cover plates over the space next to the transmission.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


4:16

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


5:1

5 Steering

Contents 5 Steering
5 Steering ...............................................................................................................5:3
5.2 Power assisted system ....................................................................................5:4
5.2.6 Link arm ......................................................................................................5:8
5.2.12 Sensor steering wheel reading....................................................................5:9

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


5:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


5 Steering – Steering 5:3

5 Steering
Steering, general
The function steering means to steer the machine while operating. The
machine is steered with the rear wheels by a power-assisted steering
system.

Joystick or mini-wheel steering is available as an option and means


that the machine is steered electronically by a control in the driver
seat armrest.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


5:4 5 Steering – Power assisted system

5.2 Power assisted system


Power assisted system, function description
The function power assisted system refers to steering the machine.
The machine's steering is power-assisted with pressure from the
hydraulic oil pumps.

Steering consists of steering wheel, steering wheel shaft, steering


valve, hydraulic oil pump, priority valve, steering cylinder, link arms
and wheel spindles.

The steering wheel (via the steering shaft) acts on the steering valve
which in turn directs oil pressure from the hydraulic oil pump to the
steering cylinder. The priority valve, located between the hydraulic oil
pump and the steering valve, gives priority to oil supply of the steering
valve before other functions, e.g. load handling. The steering cylinder
acts on the wheel spindles. The link arms are located between the
steering cylinder and wheel spindles.

2
PP P
C
CF LS
T
5
P

LS T L R
3

1
6
008053

1. Hydraulic oil pump 4. Steering wheel


2. Priority valve 5. Steering valve
3. Shuttle valve 6. Steering cylinder

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


5 Steering – Power assisted system 5:5

Joystick control/mini-wheel, function description

Joystick control or mini-wheel steering means that the machine is


controlled by an electrical control in the left armrest of the operator's
seat. The electrical control sends signals to the control system. The
steering cylinder is pressurised by a control valve that is also controlled
by the control system.

Joystick control and mini-wheel function in the same way, the difference
is in the design of the control.

NOTE
The standard steering wheel always has priority over joystick control
or mini-wheel steering. Joystick control or mini-wheel steering are
disabled as soon as a steering wheel movement is made.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


5:6 5 Steering – Power assisted system

Condition Reference value


Joystick control activated Voltage signal from switch mini-wheel/joystick control
Steering wheel No signal from sensor steering wheel reading
stationary
Speed Under 2 km/h (when activated)
Control breaker Not activated

11
D D
2
13 3
D790-2 D790-1

12 D797-2
4
D 5 D
8
C PP
P
9 LS
P CF P
TP
6
LS
T
T LS B A
T
7 L R

10

009639
1. Hydraulic oil pump 7. Shuttle valve
2. Switch joystick or Switch mini-wheel 8. Priority valve
3. Control unit cab (D790-1) 9. Steering valve
4. Control unit frame (D797-2) 10. Steering cylinder
5. Solenoid valve steering right (Y636-3) or Solenoid 11. Steering wheel
steering left (Y636-4) 12. Sensor steering wheel reading (B770)
6. Control valve joystick control or mini-wheel 13. Control unit, cab KIT (D790-2)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


5 Steering – Power assisted system 5:7

Power assisted system, component location

4 6
5 7

014828
1
Components hydraulics
1. Hydraulic oil pump for steering and load handling 5. Steering valve
2. Shuttle valve 6. Control valve mini-wheel/joystick control
3. Priority valve 7. Steering axle with steering cylinder
4. Connection block return oil

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


5:8 5 Steering – Link arm

2 3

5
4

008074
Electric components
1. Sensor steering wheel reading (B770) Joystick or mini-wheel (R825)
2. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 4. Control unit cab (D790-1)
3. Switch activates joystick or mini-wheel (S113) 5. Control unit frame option (D797-2)

5.2.6 Link arm

Link arm, checking


Check the link arms' guide bearings, axles and the bolts that lock
the link arms' axles.
007918

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


5 Steering – Sensor steering wheel reading 5:9

5.2.12 Sensor steering wheel reading


Sensor steering wheel reading, checking

1 (product option mini-wheel or joystick control)


2
Check that the joystick control and mini-wheel disconnect when the
steering wheel is turned.

Also check that the sensor for the steering wheel reading is secure in
its bracket and that the multi-function levers are secure by unfastening
the bottom of the steering wheel panel.

002628

1. Indicator ring
2. Sensor steering wheel reading (B770)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


5:10

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6:1

6 Suspension

Contents 6 Suspension
6 Suspension .........................................................................................................6:3
6.2 Suspension ......................................................................................................6:4
6.2.1 Steering axle cradle ....................................................................................6:4
6.2.2 Wheel spindle..............................................................................................6:5
6.2.3 Wheel hub ...................................................................................................6:5
6.3 Tyres and rims .................................................................................................6:7
6.3.1 Tyres .........................................................................................................6:14
6.3.2 Rim ............................................................................................................6:15

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Suspension 6:3

6 Suspension
Suspension, description
The machine's wheel suspension is made up of its tyres (with
associated rims and bolts), steering axle with hubs, wheel spindles,
and the steering axle's suspension in the frame. The drive axle belongs
to the driveline/axle, see section 3 Driveline/Axle, group3.3 Drive axle.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:4 6 Suspension – Suspension

6.2 Suspension
Suspension, description
The steering axle cradle is mounted to the frame with two bushings,
one at the leading edge and one at the trailing edge of the steering
axle cradle. In the steering axle cradle there are two wheel spindles
mounted on journalled shafts. The wheel spindle is flexible to enable
steering. On the wheel spindles there are journalled wheel hubs where
the wheels are mounted.

Suspension, component location


Suspension refers to:
1 2 3 4 5 6
• Steering axle cradle
• Steering spindle
• Wheel hub
008047

Steering axle
1. Wheel hub
2. Wheel spindle
3. Link arm
4. Steering axle cradle
5. Steering cylinder
6. Spindle bolt / bearing

6.2.1 Steering axle cradle

Steering axle cradle, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety, with transverse


wheels.

2 Check that the bushings in the suspension are intact.


008078

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Wheel spindle 6:5

3 Measure the distance between the frame and the steering axle
cradle. Note the measurement.
4 Lift the machine under the rear counterweight.

NOTE
Do not lift under the steering axle.

5 Again, measure the distance between the frame and the steering
axle cradle. Note the measurement.
6 Calculate the difference between the two measurements. The
difference may be max. 3 mm. If the difference is greater, the
bushing must be replaced.

007842
The figure shows front mounting

6.2.2 Wheel spindle


Wheel spindle bearing, checking
1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety, with transverse
wheels.

2 Measure dimension A with a feeler gauge. Note the measurement.


3 Lift the machine under the rear counterweight.
4 Re-measure measurement A.
5 Calculate the difference between the two measurements. The
difference must be max. 0.25 mm.
If the difference is greater, shimming must be repeated, see
Workshop manual.
A
008079

6.2.3 Wheel hub

Wheel hub, checking

1 Clean the hub covers on the control wheels.


2 Remove the hub cover.
3 Wipe off grease from hub cap and hub nut. Handle it as
environmentally hazardous waste.
008080

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:6 6 Suspension – Wheel hub

4 Bend up the lock washer's tabs, remove the lock nut and the lock
washer.

5 Torque the bearing nut as follows.


A. Lube the thread on the spindle and the side of the nut that
faces the bearing with oil SAE 80W/140 or equivalent.
B. Tighten the nut to 250 Nm.
C. Rotate the hub at least 2 revolutions and then tighten the nut
45 degrees.
D. Rotate the hub again at least 2 revolutions and then tighten
the nut another 45 degrees.
6 Fit the lock washer and outer lock nut.
7 Tighten to at least 250 Nm or as tight as required to fold the
locking washer into the closest groove.
8 Fill the bearing cap with grease and fit it.
9 Grease the wheel bearing with grease through the grease nipple.
Lift the seal ring's lip with a small screwdriver to facilitate pressing
out of air. Grease until grease comes out by the seal.

NOTE
Be careful so that the seal is not damaged.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Tyres and rims 6:7

6.3 Tyres and rims


Tyres and rims, safety

DANGER
Always block wheels on the side of the axle that is
not going to be worked on before placing the jack.
Always secure the jack to prevent it from slipping out
of position.
Deflate the tyres before removing. Otherwise the lock
ring and lock lugs can release and shoot off when the
pressure changes. For twin tyres, both tyres must be
deflated!
The air should always be released through the valve. If
this is not possible - drill holes in the tread to release
the air. Damaged tyres may explode.
Never stand in front of the tyre when deflating or
inflating. Lock ring and lock lugs may release and
shoot off when the pressure changes.
Never install damaged tyres or rims.
It's prohibited to repair rims with welding.
It's prohibited to operate the machine if one of the
tyres is flat.
Wheels, tyres, and rims are dimensioned and selected
for each machine type so that max. wheel loads
and operating speeds are not exceeded. Therefore,
changing of tyre dimension, tyre brand, tyre type, rim
type, or rim brand is not permitted without approval
from Cargotec.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:8 6 Suspension – Tyres and rims

CAUTION
When removing wheels, leave the wheel nuts in place
after they have been loosened. If the wheel nuts are
removed immediately the wheel may release from the
hub.
When removing drive wheels, make sure that the
wheels are secured when removing the spacer rings.
If the wheels move they may move the spacer rings,
which may result in crushing injuries.
When installing drive wheels, ensure that the clamps
clamp straight on the spacer ring.
Wheel nuts should be check-tightened after 4-5
operating hours.
Always follow the tyre manufacturer's or other approved
instructions when changing tyres.
Never use a steel hammer to install or remove rim
components. Instead, use a lead, brass, or plastic
mallet.
Keep tyre pressures at the prescribed level. Loosely
inflated tyres impair stability and reduce the machine's
capacity.
Remove penetrating objects such as crushed glass,
pieces of wood, metal filings, etc.
Check if tyre wear is abnormal, this could indicate a
mechanical fault. Rectify faults immediately and change
damaged tyres.

Tyre and rim system, description


The tyres are the points of contact between the machine and the
ground, and the tyres absorb unevennesses and provide suspension.

The drive axle is exposed to high forces during operation, if the drive
wheels' rolling circumference is different the stresses increase on
the drive axle. It is important that the tyres on the drive axle are the
same model, type and make, and have equal wear and proper inflation
pressure.

Tyres and rims, check


Read the safety instructions before working with tyres and rim, see
Tyres and rims, safety, page 6:7.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Tyres and rims 6:9

DANGER
Never stand in front of the tyre when deflating or
inflating! Lock ring and lock lugs may release and
shoot off when the pressure changes.
The air should always be released through the valve. If
this is not possible - drill holes in the tread to release
the air. Damaged tyres may explode.
Do not exceed prescribed air pressure! When changing
tyre or rim version, another air pressure may apply,
contact Cargotec.

1 Check the rims.


1 2 3
• Check that the lock ring and lugs are installed correctly.
• Check that there are no cracks in the rims' parts.
In case of damage, the tyre and rim must be removed and
checked.
008081

1. Lock ring
2. Rim bead seat taper
3. Rim

2 Check the air pressure in the tyres, see section Tyres, inflating,
page 6:14.
The pressure must be 1.0 MPa, inflate if necessary.
3 Check the tyres.
• Check for uneven and fast wear, this is caused by mechanical
defects such as, e.g., uneven brake action. Make sure that
such defects are repaired immediately.
• Remove penetrating objects such as crushed glass, pieces of
wood, metal filings, etc.
If the tyre is damaged, the wheel shall be dismantled and the tyre
shall be changed, see Tyre, change, page 6:15.
4 If the tyres and rims have no defects, check-tighten the wheel nuts.
Tighten crosswise to a torque of:
• 650 Nm oiled screw.
008153

Examples: The figure shows inflation of drive wheel.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:10 6 Suspension – Tyres and rims

Tyre and rim system, removing and fitting (drive


axle)
Read the safety instructions before working with tyres and rim, see
Tyres and rims, safety, page 6:7.
Removing
1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Lift the machine under the drive axle by the relevant wheel.
Support under the drive axle in a secure way.

DANGER
With double wheel fitting both tyres must be deflated
otherwise the inner may explode when the outer is
removed.
Risk of tyre explosion! Fatal danger!
Empty both tyres of air.

3 Release the air from the tyres by:


a) Unscrewing the valve and releasing the air.
014571

b) If this does not work, undo the valve in the rim and release the air.
014573

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Tyres and rims 6:11

c) If this does not work, break off, cut or saw off the valve pipe.

014572
d) If it is not possible to release the air via the valve connection, the
tyre must be emptied by drilling a hole in the tyre's tread. Use a
drill bit of a max. Ø 5 mm.

005123

4 Secure the wheel with the lifting equipment, i.e. make sure that
the wheel is positioned safely for lifting in the lifting equipment.
5 Remove all wheel nuts.
6 Lift the wheel away and position it safely so that it does not fall or
move.
7 Secure the inner drive wheel with lifting equipment.
8 Remove the spacer ring.

NOTE
The spacer ring is heavy.

9 Remove the inner drive wheel and position it safely so that it does
not fall or move.
005124

Installing
10 Fit the inner drive wheel. Take care that the screw threads are
not damaged.

11 Fit the spacer ring.

12 Install the outer drive wheel. Take care that the screw threads
are not damaged.

13 Fit the wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise in turn with
increasing torque to 650 Nm.

14 Inflate the tyres, see Tyres, inflating, page 6:14.

15 Lower the machine and remove the jack.

16 Test-drive the machine and check that the wheels are secure.

17 Check-tighten the wheel nuts crosswise to a torque of 650 Nm.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:12 6 Suspension – Tyres and rims

Tyre and rim system, removing and fitting


(steering axle)
Read the safety instructions before working with tyres and rim, see
Tyres and rims, safety, page 6:7.
Removing
1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Lift the machine under the steering axle by the relevant wheel.
Support under the steering axle in a secure way.

3 Release the air from the tyres by:


a) Unscrewing the valve and releasing the air.
014571

b) If this does not work, undo the valve in the rim and release the air.
014573

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Tyres and rims 6:13

c) If this does not work, break off, cut or saw off the valve pipe.

014572
d) If it is not possible to release the air via the valve connection, the
tyre must be emptied by drilling a hole in the tyre's tread. Use a
drill bit of a max. Ø 5 mm.

005123

4 Secure the wheel with the lifting equipment, i.e. make sure that
the wheel is positioned safely for lifting in the lifting equipment.
5 Remove the wheel nuts.
6 Remove the wheel and position it safely so that it does not fall or
move.
Installing
7 Fit the wheel.
8 Fit the wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise in turn with
increasing torque to 650 Nm.
9 Inflate the tyre, see Tyres, inflating, page 6:14.
10 Lower the machine and remove the jack.
11 Test-drive the machine and check that the wheels are secure.
12 Check-tighten the wheel nuts crosswise to a torque of 650 Nm.
005124

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:14 6 Suspension – Tyres

6.3.1 Tyres
Tyres, inflating
Read the safety instructions before working with tyres and rim, see
Tyres and rims, safety, page 6:7.

DANGER
Always follow the instructions for inflating tyres to
avoid risk of accidents.
Only use approved rim components.
If the tyre has been completely deflated, the tyre must
be dismantled and the rim checked for damage.
Never install rim components by striking with a
hammer while inflating. Never strike fully or partly
inflated tyres or rim sets.
Never inflate tyres before all parts are in place.
008153

Wheels shall be inflated on the machine or in a


protective device, designed and dimensioned so that
it can handle or dissipate a shock wave from a tyre
Examples: The figure shows inflation of drive wheel.
explosion as well as catch the ejected parts.
Do not exceed the prescribed tyre pressures which
must be checked at ambient temperature. When
changing tyre or rim version, another air pressure
may apply, contact Cargotec. Plate for air pressure
in tyres must be replaced with a plate that shows
applicable pressure.
Never stand in front of the tyre when deflating or
inflating. Lock ring and lock lugs may release and
shoot off when the pressure changes.
Check that all parts are in place when the tyre
pressure is 30 kPa.

NOTE
An air filter and water trap should be installed on the line from the
compressor that is used to inflate tyres to avoid rim corrosion.

1 Make sure that the lock ring and lock lugs are in the correct
position before inflating.

2 Connect the compressor with a locking air-chuck to the nipple


on the tyre.

3 Stand at an angle behind the tyre and remain there until inflating
has been completed in order to prevent being hit by rim parts in
the event of an explosion.

4 Inflate the tyre to prescribed pressure, see specifications.


When changing tyre or rim version, another air pressure may
apply, contact Cargotec.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Rim 6:15

Tyre, change

DANGER
Changing tyres is complicated and dangerous work.
FATAL DANGER!
Leave tyre work to authorised personnel/tyre company.

Check the rim in connection with tyre change, see Rim, check, page
6:15.

6.3.2 Rim
Rim, check

DANGER
Perform the following checks to minimise risks of
accidents for all split rims.
Always use the right tyre size and a design
corresponding to the manufacturer's rim type and size.
Over-dimensioned tyres may not be used.
Replace all damaged, worn or corroded rims or
mounting parts.

1 Dismantle the rim, see Tyre, change, page 6:15.

2 Carefully clean the outside of the rim edge with a steel brush.
005375

3 Measure wear after the lock ring.


The lock ring's wear on the tyre bead often gives a mark, A in the
figure. The mark occurs between the lock ring's ends.
Measure wear depth at point A using a steel ruler and sliding
gauge. If wear exceeds 0.5 mm then the wheel rim, lock ring and
the tapered rim must be discarded and replaced with new parts.
A

Max 0,5 mm
005377

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:16 6 Suspension – Rim

4 Check the rim's diameter.


Measure the rim edge's circumference (O) with a measuring tape
and calculate the diameter (D). [D = Circumference (O) / 3.14]
Compare the value of the diameter with specified min.
measurement. If diameter is smaller, then the wheel rim, lock
ring, and the tapered rim must be discarded and replaced with
new parts.
D Information about min. diameter can be obtained from Cargotec.
O

005374

O. Circumference
D. Diameter

5 Check for damage in the areas with high stress concentration.


Checking is done in two steps:
1. The magnetic particle method is used to determine if there's a
crack or not, and where it is.
2. Confirmed cracks are investigated further with penetrating
fluid.
Typical rim damages are circumference cracks, corrosive damage,
rust, warping and wear.
001702

Magnetic particle method


1 Blast the applicable area clean so that it is completely free of
paint residue.
2 Test using magnetic particle inspection and the following
equipment:
• Equipment: Yoke Tiede
005375

• Method:
a Alternating current AC
Rim b Contrast colour
• Checking medium:
a Wet
b Colour (for example, Tiede Ferrolux)
If no cracks are detected with the magnetic particle method,
checking is finished and the applicable area is approved.
If cracks are indicated, the crack should be investigated further
with penetrating fluid.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


6 Suspension – Rim 6:17

Checking cracks with penetrating fluid


1 Clean the area with cleaning fluid part no. 923626.0668.
2 Spray penetrating fluid part no. 923626.0669 on the cleaned area
and let dry 10 min.
3 Wash off penetrating fluid with cleaning fluid part no. 923626.0668.
Thoroughly wipe off the cleaning fluid with a drying cloth and let

005376
any remaining cleaning fluid evaporate.
4 Spray detection fluid part no. 923626.0670 on the area.
Rim
5 Let the sprayed area dry 1-2 hours.

6 Visually inspect the area.


1 2
If the tested area does not show signs of linear or point-shaped
cracks, it is approved.
If the crack check indicates linear or point-shaped cracks, contact
Cargotec Support.
001705

Examples of cracks
1. Linear crack
2. Pointed crack

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


6:18

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7:1

7 Load handling

Contents 7 Load handling


7 Load handling .....................................................................................................7:3
7.2 Lifting/lowering .................................................................................................7:5
7.2.2 Servo filter ...................................................................................................7:7
7.2.8 Sensor, hydraulic pressure lift cylinder........................................................7:9
7.2.9 Mast ............................................................................................................7:9
7.2.10 Position sensor mast .................................................................................7:13
7.2.11 Trolley........................................................................................................7:14
7.4 Side shift ........................................................................................................7:16
7.5 Spreading.......................................................................................................7:19
7.5.4 Spreader beam .........................................................................................7:24
7.7 Tilt ..................................................................................................................7:27
7.7.2 Servo filter .................................................................................................7:29
7.7.7 Tilt cylinder ................................................................................................7:29
7.7.8 Mast ..........................................................................................................7:29
7.8 Levelling.........................................................................................................7:30
7.9 Load carrier....................................................................................................7:33
7.9.1 Twistlocks ..................................................................................................7:33
7.9.2 Lifting hook ................................................................................................7:40
7.10 Other functions...............................................................................................7:49
7.10.1 Container counter......................................................................................7:49
7.10.2 Speed reduction ........................................................................................7:49

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Load handling 7:3

7 Load handling
Load handling, general
The function load handling refers to, e.g. lifting/lowering, side shift,
tilt, levelling and securing a load. Load handling also includes help
functions to handle loads, e.g. container counter.

Load handling is divided into different sub-functions.


• Lifting/lowering
• Side shift
• Spreading
• Tilt
• Levelling
• Load carrier (side lift attachment with twistlock locking or lifting
hook with lock lug)
009149

• Other
Lifting/lowering - Container counter

Load handling is primarily controlled with the control levers while


certain functions have separate switches.

Certain sub-functions (e.g. Load carrier) can in turn be divided into


different technical solutions. In these cases, the sub-function is
broken down into further sub-functions.

Many functions change depending on the options with which the


machine is equipped. In these cases the basic function is described
first, then there is a description of how the different options affect
the basic function.
014022

Side shift
014023

Spreading

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:4 7 Load handling – Load handling

009150
Tilt
014021

Levelling

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Lifting/lowering 7:5

7.2 Lifting/lowering
Lifting/lowering, function description
Lifting/lowering means that the mast's components are raised and
lowered so that the attachment is raised and lowered. The machine
is equipped with a duplex lift mast. During lifting, the inner mast is
raised with the lift cylinders. The chain that is secured in the carriage
(and in the outer mast) runs over the chain wheel at the top of the
inner mast, and by these means the carriage is also lifted at the
same time as the inner mast. The lift cylinders are pressurised by the
Control valve lift and tilt.

During lifting, an extra hydraulic pump is connected (assuming that


the conditions for quick lift have been met) in order to increase the
speed of the lifting movement.

The lifting/lowering function is controlled by electric servo. Electric

009149
servo means that the control levers are electrical and send voltage
signals to the control system to control the lifting/lowering function.

Damping

Damping means that the speed of functions is reduced automatically


close to upper end position. This entails that mechanical parts are
exposed to less stress when stopping in end-positions.

Position sensors sense when damping should be activated. When


damping is activated, the relevant control unit reduces the control
current to the solenoid valve for the relevant function.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:6 7 Load handling – Lifting/lowering

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated
Twistlocks Locked or unlocked, not intermediate position
Contact Mast down: no contact
By-passed or lift height lower than the height limitation.
Height limitation

2 4
D790-1 D794

D797-1
3
17
1b 1a 19
5

LS
18
14 P

A2
11 B2
12 P PS
6
10 19
C
P EF
7
LS
9

16 C C

014729
13 15 8
1. Control lever 10. Pressure reducer
a Control lever lifting/lowering (R8071) 11. Accumulator
b Control lever (S815-P1) 12. Servo filter
2. Control unit cab (D790-1) 13. Quick-lift pump
3. Control unit frame (D797-1) 14. Solenoid valve quick lift (Y6062-2)
4. Control unit engine (D794) 15. Hydraulic oil pump
5. Solenoid valve lifting (Y6005) and lowering (Y6004) 16. Pressure limiting valve
6. Control valve lift and tilt 17. Position sensor mast (B7211-2)
7. Shuttle valve 18. Hydraulic pressure sensor lift cylinder (B768-1)
8. Main pump 19. Lift cylinders
9. Priority valve

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Servo filter 7:7

Lifting/lowering, component location

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

11

10

009179
1. Pressure reducer 7. Hydraulic pressure sensor lift cylinder (B768-1)
2. Accumulator servo circuit 8. Hydraulic oil pumps
3. Test outlet servo circuit 9. Servo filter
4. Lift cylinder 10. Control valve lift and tilt
5. Position sensor mast (B7211-2) 11. Side lift attachment
6. Mast

7.2.2 Servo filter

Servo filter, change

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Depressurise the hydraulic and brake systems, see section B


Safety.

3 Turn the start key to position 0 and turn off the system voltage.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:8 7 Load handling – Servo filter

4 Clean the outside of the filter housing and filter holder.


5 Remove the filter holder and remove the cartridge downward.
6 Clean the inside of the filter holder.
7 Place the new cartridge in the filter holder.

009161
8 Check that the O-ring on the filter holder is intact and in place.
9 Fit the filter and filter holder.

10 Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank when all of the hydraulic
pistons are in retracted position. The oil should be at the top
of the sight glass. Top up as needed, for quality see section F
Technical data.

NOTE
Hydraulic oil level is checked when all hydraulic oil pistons are
pushed in.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Sensor, hydraulic pressure lift cylinder 7:9

7.2.8 Sensor, hydraulic pressure lift cylinder

Sensor hydraulic pressure lift cylinder, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Wipe the sensor clean with a rag or similar item.


3 Check the sealing and that the sensor and the sensor's connector
is securely fastened.

009188

7.2.9 Mast

Mast suspension, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Visually check that the frame's mounting points and welding


seams are intact.

3 Also check that the mast's mounting points and welding seams
are intact. Check both inside and outside.

Mast suspension, checking bearings

1 Raise and secure the trolley

WARNING
Never work under a trolley that is not secured.
Risk of crushing!
Secure the trolley properly before beginning work.

2 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

3 Visually check that the frame's mounting points and welding


seams are intact.

4 Also check that the mast's mounting points and welding seams
are intact. Check both inside and outside.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:10 7 Load handling – Mast

5 Make a marking on the mast.


6 Remove the load from the mast mountings in an appropriate
manner.
7 Make a new marking on the mast. Measure the distance between
the markings. The measurement should be max. 1 mm.
8 If the difference is greater, the bearings in the mast mountings
must be replaced, see Workshop manual.

009673

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Mast 7:11

Slide plates, checking


1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Check that the slide surfaces in the mast and trolley have a normal
appearance and do not show signs of damage or unevenness.

3 Check the clearance in the mast and between the trolley and mast.

4 When a noticeable play appears, which corresponds to a minimum


clearance of 2 mm, the clearance must be reduced by using
shims, see Workshop manual. If less than 5 mm wear limit
remains on the slide plates they must be replaced.

NOTE
Do not over-shim; this will increase the wear on the slide plates.

Lifting chains, checking and adjusting


With the aim of increasing safety, the lifting chains should be checked
regularly according to the following:
The chains must be thoroughly cleaned over their entire length. The
check is performed without a load on the side lift attachment.
The chains must be thoroughly cleaned over their entire length. The
check is performed without a load on the forks.
Wear checking
1 The chain must not have extended more than 3%. Measure the
length of the 25 links that first (and most often) travel over the
chain wheel during lifting. This is where the extension is greatest.
Compare with the value in the table. If the 3% limit is exceeded,
the chains must be replaced.

2 P-measurement = the distance between 2 pins

Measurement over 25 links


P-mea- P-mea- [mm]
005670

surement surement
[in] [mm] Max.
New chain
measurement
3/4 19.05 476.25 490
1 25.4 635 654
1.1/4 31.75 793.75 817
1.1/2 38.1 952.5 981
2 50.8 1270 1308

On chains with up to 1 inch pitch, it is possible to use a special


measuring tape intended to measure the wear.
The measuring tape is marked with:
• Zulässige Verlängerung = permitted lengthening.
• Kette austauschen = chain must be replaced.
The measuring tape can be ordered from Cargotec.

Adjusting
3 Check that the pins for the outer washers are securely fastened.

4 Check that the washers are free of visible cracks.

5 Check that the chain is free from mechanical damage.

6 Check that the chain is free of rust.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:12 7 Load handling – Mast

7 Check that the chain bends easily over the pulley (does not jam
when bending).

8 Place the machine on level surface with the mast vertical (0° tilt).

9 Lower the carriage to the bottom position.

10 Check that there is 10-20 mm of space between the carriage and


the mast. Adjust the position by tensioning or loosening the chains
equally on the adjustment nut in the carriage.

NOTE
If the chain is slack when the carriage is in its lowest position,
the chain must be tightened.

009153

11 Adjust the chains so that the carriage is lifted evenly in the mast.

3 • Loosen the locking washers (position 1) and remove the lower


nut (position 2).
1 • Lift the chain tightener (position 4) out of the carriage and
remove the old locking washer.
• Reinstall with new locking washer, chain tightener, locking
1 washer and lower nut. Repeat on the other side.
2
009152

4 NOTE
1. Locking washer Reinstall only new locking washers.
2. Lower nut
3. Upper nut • Adjust the nuts on each side to balance the carriage so that
the distance between the carriage and mast is 10-20 mm.
4. Chain tightener
• Tighten the nuts with 2000 Nm and lock them with locking
washers.
• Test lift and check that the lifting chain stretches equally on
each side so that the carriage is balanced.
Repeat adjustments as needed.
12 Lubricate the chains after completed inspection.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Position sensor mast 7:13

7.2.10 Position sensor mast

Position sensor, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Wipe the sensors clean with a rag or similar item.


3 Check that they are secured properly.
4 Check that the distance between the sensor and the indicator pin
is 10±1 mm.

014740

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:14 7 Load handling – Trolley

7.2.11 Trolley

Slide plates in trolley, checking


Slide plates between trolley and attachment, checking
1 Park the machine with attachment lowered as far down as possible
and spreaders in their narrowest position.

2 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

3 Clean the lower slide plates (position 2) and measure the


thickness.
1
NOTE
The thickness of the slide plate should be at least 10 mm.

4 Clean the upper slide plates (position 1) and measure the


thickness.

NOTE
The thickness of the slide plate should be at least 10 mm.

5 Check the clearance between the side lift attachment and the
trolley.

NOTE
If the measured clearance between the trolley's slide plates
and the attachment's main beam is greater than 5 mm, the
clearance must be adjusted using spacer plates.
3
6 Check that the slide surface is clean and lubricate the slide surface
2 of the side lift attachment.
013681

7 Start the machine and side shift the attachment to both of its
3 end positions. Check that the clearance between trolley and
The illustration shows slide plates between trolley and attachment is sufficient along the whole of the attachment and
attachment. that there is no metallic contact.
8 For adjustment and replacement, see Workshop manual.
1. Upper slide plates
2. Lower slide plates
3. Attachment's mounting

Slide plates in trolley with levelling, checking and


adjusting

Slide plates trolley, checking


1 Park the machine with the attachment lowered as far down as
possible.

2 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

3 Check the clearance between the trolley's slide plates and the
attachment's main beam. The clearance can be checked by using
prybars.

NOTE
If the measured clearance between the trolley's slide plates
and the attachment's main beam is greater than 5 mm, the
clearance must be adjusted using spacer plates.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Trolley 7:15

Slide plates trolley, adjusting


1 Park the machine with attachment lowered as far down as possible
and spreaders in their narrowest position.

2 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

3 Unload applicable slide plate.


The slide plates can be unloaded by hoisting the side lift
attachment in the outer edge or by using wedges to change the
side lift attachment's position in the lift beam.
4 Remove the attaching bolts from the slide plate console.
5 Remove the slide plate's guide bolts.
6 Pull out the slide plate together with spacer plates and console.
7 Measure the thickness of the slide plate, replace if needed.

1 NOTE
The thickness of the slide plate should be at least 10 mm.

8 Place the slide plate in the correct position.


Check the clearance between the side lift attachment and the
trolley. Clearance should be less than 1 mm with all slide plates
installed.
Use a spacer plate to adjust the clearance.

NOTE
Generally, the upper slide plate is adjusted on the front side
of the trolley and the lower slide plate on the back side of the
trolley with spacer plates.

1
NOTE
2 Do not over-shim; this will increase the wear on the slide plates.

NOTE
Check that the attaching bolts for all slide plates are tightened.
009190

9 Install the slide plate console.


The illustration shows slide plates, roller plates on the 10 Install the slide plate guide bolt.
trolley with mechanical levelling.
11 Check that the slide surface is clean and lubricate the slide surface
1. Slide plates and roller plates of the side lift attachment.
2. Retaining screws and guide screws for slide
plates and roller plates 12 Start the machine and check the function of the side lift attachment.
Try to lift a container and then re-check the clearance of the side
lift attachment in the trolley.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:16 7 Load handling – Side shift

7.4 Side shift


Side shift, function description
Side shift means moving the attachment sideways. Control valve
attachment pressurises the side shift cylinder that pushes the
attachment's main beam 600 mm in relation to the trolley.

The side shift function is controlled by electric servo. Electric servo


means that the control levers are electrical and send voltage signals
to the control system to control the side shift function.

014022

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Side shift 7:17

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated

1a 1b
2
D790-1

D797-1 D791-1
3 8

9 11

P1 A

4
T1 B

10
5

C
6
7

014024
1. Control lever 6. Shuttle valve
a Control lever side shift (R8073) 7. Hydraulic oil pump
b Control lever (S815-P3) 8. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
2. Control unit cab (D790-1) 9. Solenoid valve, side shift left (Y6020) and right
3. Control unit frame (D797-1) (Y6021)
4. Solenoid valve activation main pump (Y6062) 10. Control valve attachment
5. Shuttle valve 11. Side shift cylinder

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:18 7 Load handling – Side shift

Side shift, component location

2 3 5
4

014030
1. Side lift attachment 4. Solenoid valve side shift right (Y6021)
2. Side shift cylinder 5. Solenoid valve side shift left (Y6020)
3. Control valve attachment 6. Hydraulic oil pumps

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Spreading 7:19

7.5 Spreading
Spreading, function description
Damping
Spreading means changing the width between the twistlocks or lifting
hooks. The spreading distance is between 20 feet (side lift attachment
retracted) and 40 feet (side lift attachment maximum extension). A
30-foot stop is also available as an option.

The control valve attachment pressurises the spreading cylinders,


which pull the spreading booms in and out.

The spreading function is controlled by electric servo. Electric servo


means that the control levers are electrical and send voltage signals
to the control system to control the spreading function. Inductive
position sensors indicate the position of the spreader booms.
Damping
014023 Damping means that the speed of functions is reduced automatically
close to end-positions. Four seconds after damping has been
activated the function is cancelled. This entails that mechanical parts
are exposed to less stress when stopping in end-positions.

Position sensors sense when damping should be activated. When


damping is activated, the relevant control unit reduces the control
current to the solenoid valve for the relevant function.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:20 7 Load handling – Spreading

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated
Twistlocks / Lock lugs Unlocked or bypass activated

1b 1a 2
D790-1

D797-1 D791-1 8
3

9 10
C
P1
4 11
T1
A B A B

5 14 15

C
6 12 13
7

014025
1. a. Switch spreading 20'-40' (S1012) 9. Solenoid valve, spreading out right (Y6018R) and
spreading in right (Y6019R)
b. Control lever (S815-T1.1 and S815-T1.2)
10. Solenoid valve, spreading out left (Y6018L) and
2. Control unit cab (D790-1) spreading in left (Y6019L)
3. Control unit frame (D797-1) 11. Control valve attachment
4. Solenoid valve activation main pump (Y6062-1) 12. Spreading cylinder, right
5. Shuttle valve 13. Spreading cylinder, left
6. Shuttle valve 14. Sensor, end-position 20'-40' right (B769R)
7. Hydraulic oil pump 15. Sensor, end-position 20'-40' left (B769L)
8. Control unit attachment (D791-1)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Spreading 7:21

30-foot stop, function description


30-foot stop is an option for spreading and is activated with Switch
stop at 30'. When 30-foot stop is activated spreading stops at 30
feet, to spread further the spreading must be activated once again.
Two inductive position sensors indicate the position of the spreading
beams and activate damping. At 30 foot stop, two sensors are used
to control the stop.

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated
Twistlocks / Lock lugs Unlocked or bypass activated

1
2b 2a 30-
35

3
D790-1

D791-1
4

30' 30'

014026
5 5 6 7 6 7
1. Switch stop at 30' (S1004) Solenoid valve spreading in left (Y6019L) and
Solenoid valve spreading in right (Y6019R)
2. a. Switch spreading 20'-40' (S1012)
6. Sensor end-position 30' left (B777L) and Sensor
b. Control lever (S815-T1.1 and S815-T1.2) end-position 30' right (B777R)
3. Control unit cab (D790-1) 7. Sensor end-position 20'-40' left (B769L) and Sensor
4. Control unit attachment (D791-1) end-position 20"-40" right (B769R)
5. Solenoid valve spreading out left (Y6018L) and
Solenoid valve spreading out right (Y6018R) or

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:22 7 Load handling – Spreading

Automatic spreading 20-40 foot, function


description

Automatic spreading 20"-40" is an option for spreading that is activated


with Switch automatic spreading 20"-40". When the switch is activated,
spreading automatically moves to the next end position when spreading
is activated using the control lever. The buzzer on the trolley sounds
during automatic spreading.

If the machine is also equipped with 30 foot stop and this is activated,
spreading stops at 30 foot. Activate spreading again to go to the next
position.

Automatic spreading works for both spreading in and spreading out.

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated
Twistlocks / Lock lugs Unlocked or bypass activated
Doors Closed
Parking brake Released

1a
1b
3 5
D790-1 D795

4 D791-1

10 9 7 6 8 6 7 9 10

1. a. Switch spreading 20'-40' (S1012) 014759

b. Control lever (S815-T1.1 and S815-T1.2)


2. Switch automatic spreading 20'-40' (S1012-2)
3. Control unit cab (D790-1)
4. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
5. Control unit KID (D795)
6. Solenoid valve spreading out (Y6018L & Y6018R)
7. Solenoid valve spreading in (Y6019L & Y6019R)
8. Buzzer automatic spreading (H9003)
9. Sensor end-position 20'-40' (B769L & B769R)
10. Sensor end-position 30' (B777L & B777R)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Spreading 7:23

Spreading, component location


4

1 5
3

10
9
8
7 8-10

014031
1. Spreader beam 7. Sensor damping 20' and 40' (B769L & B769R), 30'
2. Spreading cylinders stop, Sensor damping 30' (B777L & B777R)

3. Control valve attachment 8. Indicator plate 20'

4. Solenoid valve spreading in (Y6019L & Y6019R) 9. Indicator plate 30'

5. Solenoid valve spreading out (Y6018L & Y6018R) 10. Indicator plate 40'

6. Hydraulic oil pumps

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:24 7 Load handling – Spreader beam

7.5.4 Spreader beam


Spreader beam, description
The spreader beams are the part of the attachment that grips the
container. Two spreader beams run inside the main beam. The
spreader beams are slid in and out with hydraulic cylinders.

Twistlocks are fitted in the spreader beam, see 7.9.1 Twistlocks,


page 7:33.

014737

Spreader beams

Slide plates spreading beam, checking


1 Park the machine with attachment lowered as far down as possible
and spreaders extended approx. 1000 mm.
2 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

1000 mm
013683

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Spreader beam 7:25

3 Check that the clearance between slide plates and main beam is
max 5 mm both laterally and vertically. This is equivalent to the
dimensions X1-X2 = max. 5 mm and Y1-Y2 = max. 5 mm.

NOTE
If the measured clearance between slide plates and beams
is greater than 5 mm, the clearance must be adjusted using
adjustment shims.

Y2
Y1
4 For adjustment and replacement, see Workshop manual.

X2
013689
X1
Right side
Y2
Y1

X2
013690

X1
Left side

Slide plates, spreader beam for attachment with


levelling, checking and adjusting.

Slide plates spreading beam, checking


1 Park the machine with attachment lowered as far down as possible
and spreaders in their narrowest position.

2 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:26 7 Load handling – Spreader beam

3 Check the clearance between slide plates and the attachment's


main beam as well as between slide plates and spreader beam.
The clearance can be checked by lifting the spreader beam in the
outer edge or by using prybars.

NOTE
If the measured clearance between the trolley's slide plates
and the attachment's main beam is greater than 5 mm, the
clearance must be adjusted using spacer plates.

Slide plates spreader beam, adjusting


1 Park the machine with attachment lowered as far down as possible
and spreaders in their narrowest position.

2 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.

1 3 Unload applicable slide plate.


The slide plates can be unloaded by hoisting the spreading
attachment in the outer edge or by using wedges to change the
spreading beam's position in the attachment's main beam.
4 Remove the attaching bolts from the slide plate console.
5 Remove the slide plate's guide bolts.
6 Pull out the slide plate together with spacer plates and console.
7 Measure the thickness of the slide plate, replace if needed.

2 NOTE
The thickness of the slide plate should be at least 10 mm.

8 Place the slide plate in the correct position.


Check the clearance between spreader beam and slide plate.
Clearance should be less than 1 mm with all slide plates installed.
Use a spacer plate to adjust the clearance.

NOTE
009189

Generally, the upper slide plate is adjusted on the spreading


1 beam's / main beam's front side and the lower slide plate on the
The illustration shows the inner slide plates on the side spreading beam's / main beam's back side with spacer plates.
lift attachment's spreader beam.
1. Slide plates.
NOTE
2. Retaining screws and guide screws for slide
plates Do not over-shim; this will increase the wear on the slide plates.

NOTE
Check that the attaching bolts for all slide plates are tightened.

9 Install the slide plate console.


10 Install the slide plate guide bolt.
11 Check that the slide surface is clean and lubricate the slide surface
of the spreading beam.
12 Start the machine and check the spreading function. Try to lift a
container and then re-check the clearance of the spreader beams
in the attachment's main beam.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Tilt 7:27

7.7 Tilt
Tilt, function description
Tilt means the angling of the mast in relation to the machine. Control
valve lift and tilt pressurises the tilt cylinders which angle the mast in
relation to the machine. Tilt is controlled with control lever, tilt.

The tilt function is controlled by electric servo. Electric servo means


that the control levers are electrical and send voltage signals to the
control system to control the tilt function.

009150

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:28 7 Load handling – Tilt

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated

1b 1a 2
D790-1

13 14
D797-1
3

13 14
P A1

B1
T1
P PS 7
10
11

EF
C P 8
C

5
12
4 4

009656
1. Control lever 7. Control valve lift and tilt
a Control lever tilt 8. Priority valve
b Control lever (S815-P2) 9. Pressure reducer
2. Control unit cab (D790-1) 10. Accumulator
3. Control unit frame (D797-1) 11. Servo filter
4. Hydraulic oil pumps 12. Return filter
5. Pressure limiting valve 13. Load holding valve
6. Solenoid valve tilt in (Y6011) and Solenoid valve tilt 14. Tilt cylinders
out (Y6010)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Servo filter 7:29

Tilt, component location

1 2 3 4

009178
1. Pressure reducer 6. Load holding valve
2. Accumulator servo circuit 7. Hydraulic oil pumps
3. Test outlet servo circuit 8. Servo filter
4. Mast 9. Control valve lift and tilt
5. Tilt cylinder

7.7.2 Servo filter

Servo filter, change


See Servo filter, change, page 7:7.

7.7.7 Tilt cylinder

Tilt cylinder, checking


Check:
• visually that the frame's mounting points and welding seams are
intact.
• that the tilt fork is securely fastened to the tilt cylinder (136 Nm
tightening torque).
• that the tilt cylinders are correctly adjusted.

7.7.8 Mast

Mast suspension, checking


See Mast suspension, checking, page 7:9.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:30 7 Load handling – Levelling

7.8 Levelling
Mechanical levelling, function description
Mechanical levelling means that the attachment is angled in the
horizontal direction. This enables the machine to handle loads on
uneven ground surfaces.

Levelling is possible because the attachment's main beam is hung


with a moving suspension over the slide plates in the main beam. A
vertical clearance permits mechanical levelling ±3°.

Mechanical levelling means that the attachment lies in a floating


position and adapts itself to the incline of the container to be lifted.

014021

Active levelling, function description

Active levelling means that the attachment is angled in the horizontal


direction. This enables the machine to handle loads on uneven
ground surfaces. Levelling is possible by means of the attachment
being suspended in the trolley with two hydraulic cylinders.

Active levelling means that the attachment's tilt can be controlled


with hydraulic function. The levelling angle is locked when it is not
activated by means of the connection to the levelling cylinders being
blocked.

Active levelling means that inclination is controlled by pressurising the


hydraulic cylinders. The levelling function is controlled by electric
009439

servo. Electric servo means that the control levers are electrical and
send voltage signals to the control system to control the levelling
function.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Levelling 7:31

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated

1b 1a

2 11
D790-1
+
D797-1 D791-1
3 8

9 11
C

P1 A

4
T1 B

10
5

C
6
7

009651
1. Control lever 6. Shuttle valve
a Levelling (R8075-1) 7. Hydraulic oil pump
b Control lever (S815-P3 and S815-P4) 8. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
2. Control unit cab (D790-1) 9. Solenoid valve levelling right (Y6035) and levelling
3. Control unit frame (D797-1) left (Y6036)
4. Solenoid valve activation main pump (Y6062-1) 10. Control valve
5. Shuttle valve 11. Levelling cylinders

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:32 7 Load handling – Levelling

Levelling, component location


4
5

2
3

014032
1. Side lift attachment 4. Solenoid valve levelling right (Y6035)
2. Levelling cylinder 5. Solenoid valve levelling left (Y6036)
3. Control valve attachment 6. Hydraulic oil pumps

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Load carrier 7:33

7.9 Load carrier


Load carrier, description
Load carrier means holding any loads. Loads are secured with
twistlocks, which secure the load with rotatable lift pins or with lifting
hooks and lock lugs.

7.9.1 Twistlocks
Twistlocks, function description
The container is secured in place on the side lift attachment with two
twistlocks.

Twistlocks are controlled by Switch twistlocks. A section in Solenoid


valve attachment pressurises two hydraulic cylinders, connected in
parallel, one on each side of the side lift attachment. Each hydraulic
cylinder acts on a linkage that turns a twistlock. Four position sensors,
two on each side of the side lift attachment, detect the position of the
linkage and indicate whether twistlocks are open or locked. Indicator
lamps on the side lift attachment and in the cab, as well as a mechanical
indicator on the side lift attachment, show the status of the twistlocks.

A contact pin and a sensor at each twistlock indicate when the


attachment is in contact with the container. This is used to control
when twistlocks can be activated. An indicator light on the side lift
attachment and one in the cab indicate when the side lift attachment
has full contact. An event menu shows which twistlocks have contact
(1 - 2). To activate twistlocks, contact is required at both twistlocks.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:34 7 Load handling – Twistlocks

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated
Contact Full contact or bypass activated

2b
1 D1

2a
7 6
5
D790-1 D790-2 D795

D797-1 D791-1
4
8

17
13 16 3

P1 A

9 B
T1
15
14
10 16 3
17
D6

12 11

014028
1. Switch, lock twistlocks (S1003) 10. Shuttle valve
2. a. Switch, open twistlocks (S1002) 11. Shuttle valve
b. Control lever (S815-T2) 12. Hydraulic oil pump
3. Sensor contact left and right (B7203L and B7203R) 13. Solenoid valve open twistlocks (Y6039) and lock
twistlocks (Y6040)
4. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
14. Control valve
5. Control unit KID (D795)
15. Over centre valve
6. Control unit KIT (D790-2)
16. Lock cylinders
7. Control unit cab (D790-1)
17. Sensor unlocked twistlocks (B7204L and B7204R),
8. Control unit frame (D797-1) Sensor locked twistlocks (B7205LL and B7205RL)
9. Solenoid valve activation main pump (Y6062-1)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Twistlocks 7:35

Twistlocks, component location

1 3

4
5

11

10 6
7

014033
8

1. Control valve attachment 7. Sensor locked twistlock (B7205LL/RL)


2. Solenoid valve lock twistlocks (Y6039) 8. Contact pin
3. Solenoid valve open twistlocks (Y6040) 9. Twistlock
4. Over centre valve 10. Sensor contact (B7203L/R)
5. Hydraulic oil pumps 11. Sensor unlocked twistlock (B7204L/R)
6. Lock cylinder twistlocks

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:36 7 Load handling – Twistlocks

Twistlocks, checking

WARNING
Make sure that the engine is off when working on the
twistlocks.
Twistlocks can be locked automatically if all sensors for
contact are activated manually.

1 1 Check that the twistlocks function correctly.


2 3 Lock and open the twistlocks, check that the indicator lights work,
both in cab and on attachment.
2 Clean the twistlocks from any dirt.
3 Under the rubber cover for twistlocks: check pin, link arm and
lock nut.
4 Clean the area around sensor contact.
5 Press in the contact pin so that the head is flush with the spreader
beam's underside. Check the distance to sensor contact, the
distance should be 5±1 mm. Adjust when needed.
014716

5 4
NOTE
1. Sensor unlocked twistlock The contact pin should move easily and spring back completely.
2. Sensor contact
6 Check that the lock guide and lift pin can move freely.
3. Sensor locked twistlock
4. Lift pin 7 Fit a crowbar between lift pin (position 5) and the lift pin's guide,
check clearance max. clearance: 1-1.5 mm.
5. Contact pin

8 Turn twistlocks to locked position and check wear of the lift pin.
Replace the lift pin as required.
9 Repeat steps 1-8 on both twistlocks.
m

Max. 4 mm
m
0
.7
in
M

009776

Wear limits lift pin.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Twistlocks 7:37

Twistlock, checking for cracks

DANGER
Twistlocks should be checked in accordance with
recommended intervals. The interval is calculated
according to the machine being used for normal
handling and on a level, smooth ground surface. For
other handling or, e.g., rough surface, the interval
should be shortened.
If there are signs of cracking, the machine must be
immediately taken out of operation and Cargotec
Service contacted.

WARNING
Make sure that the engine is off when working on the
twistlocks.
Twistlocks can be locked automatically if all sensors for
contact are activated manually.

DANGER
Material fatigue, reduced strength.
Fatal danger!
Change twistlocks that shows signs of cracks or
other external damage, or twistlocks with more than
10 000 operating hours.

NOTE
Check for cracks shall take place every other year or every 4000
operating hours.

1 Remove the lift pins from the attachment.

NOTE
Twistlocks are heavy, be careful when removing.

2 Check for cracks within the marked area on the lift pins without
causing damage.
3 If the lift pins show signs of cracking, they must be replaced with
new ones.
009777

4 Install approved twistlocks.


Area for checking for cracks on lift pins
NOTE
Use new bearing cap, new bolts and new lock nuts.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:38 7 Load handling – Twistlocks

Sensor contact, checking and adjusting


1 Check that the contact pins in the corner boxes can move freely up
and down. The contact pins shall spring down when not loaded.
2 Check that the sensor is free of damage and dirt.
3 Turn the start key to position I and check that the light indicators
on the sensor are turned off.
4 Lower the attachment onto a container and check that Indicator
light contact is lit.
5 Lift the container a little bit so that the Indicator light contact is
switched off.
6 With the container raised, check how much movement on the

014717
contact pins is needed to detect contact (light indicator on the
1 2 sensor is lit). The movement should be 3–4 mm.
Right side
1. Sensor contact
2. Contact pin

7 If necessary, loosen the lock nut and screw in/out the sensor until
the distance between the sensor and the contact pin is 5±1 mm.
014718

2 1

Left side
1. Sensor contact
2. Contact pin

Sensor twistlocks, checking and adjusting


1 Check that the sensors are free of damage and dirt.
2 Turn the start key to position I and check that the light indicator
on the sensor for unlocked twistlock is lit.
If necessary, loosen the lock nut and screw in/out the sensor until
the distance between the sensor and the indicator plate is 5±1 mm.
3 Check that indicator light twistlocks open is lit.
4 Lower the attachment over a container and lock twistlocks.
5 Check that the light indicator on the sensor for locked twistlock
is lit.
If necessary, loosen the lock nut and screw in/out the sensor until
014719

1 2 the distance between the sensor and the indicator plate is 5±1 mm.

Right side
1. Sensor unlocked twistlock
2. Sensor locked twistlock

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Twistlocks 7:39

6 Check that indicator light twistlocks locked is lit.

014720
2 1

Left side
1. Sensor unlocked twistlock
2. Sensor locked twistlock

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:40 7 Load handling – Lifting hook

7.9.2 Lifting hook


Lifting hook, function description
The container is secured to the side lift attachment with two fixed lifting
hooks that are placed in the container's corner compartments (in the
side opening on the long side) and two movable lock lugs that are
placed in the container's corner compartments (in the side opening on
the short side) and fix the side lift attachment to the container.

The lock lugs are controlled by Switch lock lug. A section in Control
valve attachment pressurises two hydraulic cylinders connected in
parallel, one in each spreader boom. Each hydraulic cylinder acts
on a linkage that turns a lock lug. Four position sensors, two in
each spreader boom, detect the position of the linkage and indicate
whether lock lugs are open or locked. Indicator lamps on the side lift
attachment, as well as in the cab, show the status of the lock lugs.

Lock lugs are activated manually or automatically and can open if the
machine moves forward at a speed under 5 Km/h. If the lock lugs
are not locked when the attachment is holding a load, the speed is
restricted on the machine's lifting/lowering functions, and the machine's
speed is limited to max 5 Km/h.

Two detection sensors (one at each lifting hook), detect using


ultrasound at a distance (and inform the system) whether one or two
containers shall be lifted. There is a sensor that indicates contact
lower container and one that indicates contact upper container at each
lifting hook.

Two indicator lights on the side lift attachment and one in the cab
indicate when the side lift attachment has full contact. An event menu
shows which lifting hook has contact (1-2).

To activate the lock lugs, no contact is required at both lifting hooks,


but contact and correct locking are required so that the machine's
hydraulic functions and speed are not limited.

When handling double containers and automatic locking, contact is


required at all four contact sensors.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Lifting hook 7:41

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated
Contact Full contact or bypass activated

2b 1

2a
8 7
6
D790-1 D790-2 D795

D797-1 D791-1
5
9
4
14 17 3

P1 A

16 18
10 B
T1

15
11 17 3
D6 4
13 12

009653
1. Switch, lock lock lug (S1003) 10. Solenoid valve activation main pump (Y6062-1)
2. a. Switch, open lock lug (S1002) 11. Shuttle valve
b. Control lever (S815-T2) 12. Shuttle valve
3. Sensor contact left, lower and upper and right, upper 13. Hydraulic oil pump
and lower (B7203LL, B7203LU-2, B7203RL and 14. Solenoid valve open lock lug (Y6039) and lock lock
B7203RU-2). lug (Y6040)
4. Sensor detecting upper container (B7203LU/RU) 15. Control valve
5. Control unit attachment (D791-1) 16. Pilot controlled non-return valve
6. Control unit KID (D795) 17. Lock cylinders
7. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 18. Sensor unlocked lock lug (B7204L and B7204R).
8. Control unit cab (D790-1) Sensor locked lock lug (B7205LL and B7205RL).
9. Control unit frame (D797-1)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:42 7 Load handling – Lifting hook

Lifting hook, component position

1 3

4
5

6 7

12 11
10
9 13 9 8
8
7 14

014034
1. Control valve attachment 8. Sensor locked lock lug (B7205LL/RL)
2. Solenoid valve lock twistlocks (Y6039) 9. Lock cylinder lock lug
3. Solenoid valve open twistlocks (Y6040) 10. Sensor contact lower container (B7203LL/RL)
4. Over centre valve 11. Sensor detecting upper container (B7203LU/RU)
5. Hydraulic oil pumps 12. Contact pin
6. Sensor contact upper container (B7203LU-2/RU-2) 13. Lifting hook
7. Sensor unlocked lock lug (B7204L/R) 14. Lock lug

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Lifting hook 7:43

Lifting hook, checking

WARNING
Make sure that the engine is switched off when working
with lifting hooks and lock lugs.
Lock lugs can be locked automatically if all sensors for
contact are activated manually.

1 Clean the lifting hooks from any dirt.

2 Check the thickness of the lifting hooks, as illustrated. Minimum


m
46m thickness should be 46 mm.
n .
Mi 3 Replace the lifting hook as required.

014019

Lifting hook thickness

Lifting hook, checking for cracks

DANGER
Twistlocks and lifting hooks should be checked in
accordance with recommended intervals. The interval
is calculated according to the machine being used
for normal handling and on a level, smooth ground
surface. For other handling or, e.g., rough surface, the
interval should be shortened.
If there are signs of cracking, the machine must be
immediately taken out of operation and Cargotec
Service contacted.

WARNING
Make sure that the engine is switched off when working
with lifting hooks and lock lugs.
Lock lugs can be locked automatically if all sensors for
contact are activated manually.

DANGER
Material fatigue, reduced strength.
Fatal danger!
Change lifting hooks that shows signs of cracks or
other external damage, or lifting hooks with more than
10 000 operating hours.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:44 7 Load handling – Lifting hook

NOTE
Check for cracks shall take place every other year or every 4000
operating hours.

1 Remove the lifting hooks from the attachment.

NOTE
Lifting hooks are heavy, be careful when removing.

2 Check for cracks within the marked area on the lifting hooks
without causing damage.

014722
3 If the lifting hooks show signs of cracking, they must be replaced
with new ones.
Area for checking for cracks on lifting hooks
4 Install approved lifting hooks.

NOTE
Use new bolt and new lock nut.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Lifting hook 7:45

Lock lug, checking

WARNING
Make sure that the engine is switched off when working
with lifting hooks and lock lugs.
Lock lugs can be locked automatically if all sensors for
contact are activated manually.

DANGER
Wear results in reduced strength.
Fatal danger!
Replace lock lugs that show signs of wear, cracks or
exterior damage.

1 Check that the lock lugs:


• are whole and do not show signs of abnormal wear.
• do not fit loosely against the axle or lock cylinder.
• connect to and secure the container correctly when lifting.
2 Adjust or replace lock lugs as needed.

3
009643

1. Clevis pin
2. Lock lug
3. Mounting lock cylinder

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:46 7 Load handling – Lifting hook

Sensor contact, checking and adjusting

A 1 Check the sensors for contact and adjust if necessary. Check the
left and right-hand sides in the same way.
2 Measurement (A) over the contact pin on the upper container
should with unaffected contact pin be approx. 39 mm.
3 When measurement (A) decreases to 22 mm, the light (B1) for
contact with the upper container should be lit.
B

014724
4 Adjusting:
Secure the contact pin in an appropriate way so that the
B 1 measurement (A) is 22 mm. Then move the sensor along the oval
mounting hole and screw it in at exactly the position it has when
A C lamp (B1) illuminates.

B 2 5 Measurement (B) over the contact pin on the lower container


009375

should with unaffected contact pin be approx. 30 mm.

Lights on the side lift attachment 6 When measurement (B) decreases to 18 mm, the light (B2) for
contact with the lower container should be lit.
A Green light Lock lugs locked 7 Adjusting:
B1 Orange light Contact (upper container) Secure the contact pin in an appropriate way so that the
measurement (B) is 18 mm. Then move the sensor along the oval
B2 Orange light Contact (lower container)
mounting hole and screw it in at exactly the position it has when
C Red light Lock lugs released lamp (B2) illuminates.

Inductive sensor, checking and adjusting


A number of inductive sensors control the side lift attachment's
1 different functions.

The sensors are PNP - positive/negative/positive. The last P means


that the sensor sends out a positive signal when it is activated, which
happens when a magnetic object comes closer than 8 mm from the
tip of the sensor.

The sensor is fitted with a light indicator that can be used to check
the sensor's functioning.
1. The gap between sensor tip and the magnetic activator should be
set to 51 mm. At a distance greater than 8 mm the positive 24 V
signal stops, i.e. the sensor is deactivated.
5±1 mm 2. When the sensor is activated, the yellow light indicator should
be lit.
3. Check that the sensor is clean and free of grease, and that it does
not show signs of damage. (Grease can activate the sensor).
009655

2
1. Yellow LED, sensor activated
2. Magnetic activator

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Lifting hook 7:47

Sensor detecting upper container, checking


The sensors for detecting upper containers use ultrasound to detect if
there is one or two containers to be handled. The sensors are activated
when the attachment is 30-50 cm from the container and event menu
contact illuminates on the display.
1 Operate the machine forward toward the two containers and check
1 that event menu contact on the display illuminates no later than
when the attachment is 30 cm from the container.
2 If the event menu contact for the upper container does not light up:
• Determine by using a piece of cardboard or similar item which
of the sensors has not been activated.
• Clean the sensor.
• Check that the sensor and wiring are undamaged.
3 Repeat check according to item 1 above. If the event menu

014035
contact still is not lit, replace the sensor.

1. Sensor detecting upper container

Indicator light, checking


1 Check that the contact pins at the corner boxes can move freely
in and out. A pin that binds in the inner position indicates contact
B 1 even if the side lift attachment is not fully in contact with the
container.
A C Lubricate the pins as needed.

B 2 2 Check that the indicator light attachment upper container (B1)


009375

lights up when the side lift attachment lies against the upper
container.
Lights on the side lift attachment
3 Check that the indicator light (B2) lights up when the lifting hooks
A Green light Lock lugs locked are engaged.

B1 Orange light Contact (upper container) 4 Check that the indicator light (B2) goes out after lifting.

B2 Orange light Contact (lower container) 5 Lift an empty container enough that indicator light contact (B2)
goes out.
C Red light Lock lugs released
6 The inductive sensors for contact should be adjusted so that they
let off a signal when the contact pins are pushed in, see Sensor
contact, checking and adjusting , page 7:46.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:48 7 Load handling – Lifting hook

Sensor lock lugs, checking and adjusting


1 Check that the sensors are free of damage and dirt.
2 Turn the start key to position I and check that the light indicator
on the sensor for unlocked lock lugs is lit.
If necessary, loosen the lock nut and screw in/out the sensor until
the distance between the sensor and the indicator plate is 5±1 mm.
1
3 Check that indicator light lock lug open is lit.
2 4 Drive the lifting hooks into the container and lock the lock lugs.
5 Check that the light indicator on sensor for locked lock lugs is lit.
If necessary, loosen the lock nut and screw in/out the sensor until
the distance between the sensor and the indicator plate is 5±1 mm.
6 Check that the indicator light locked lock lugs is lit.

009377
3
7 Check that lock lugs lock correctly, adjust lock cylinders as needed.

Right side
1. Sensor detecting upper container
(B7203LU/RU)
2. Sensor unlocked lock lug (B7204R/L)
3. Sensor locked lock lug (B7205LL/RL), lower

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


7 Load handling – Other functions 7:49

7.10 Other functions


7.10.1 Container counter
Container counter, function description

Container counters count the number of containers lifted. The counter


has two counter units that can be reset separately. For side lift
attachments with lifting hook, the system detects whether one or two
containers are being handled and registers the corresponding number.

The container counter uses Sensor contact and Sensor twistlocks /


locked lock lug to decide when a container is lifted. The container
counter counts a lift when contact disappears with locked twistlocks
/ locked lock lug and twistlocks / lock lug do not open again within
eight seconds.

Condition Reference value


Control breaker Not activated

4
D795

D791-1
3 D
D
1 2

004297
1. Twistlock: Sensor contact left and right (B7203L and Lifting hook: Sensor locked lock lug left and right
B7203R) (B7205LL and B7205RL)
Lifting hook: Sensor contact left, lower and upper 3. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
and right, upper and lower (B7203LL, B7203LU-2,
4. Control unit KID (D795)
B7203RL and B7203RU-2)
2. Twistlock: Sensor locked twistlock left and right
(B7205LL and B7205RL)

7.10.2 Speed reduction


Speed reduction with load
When operating with a load the machine's speed is limited to 15 km/h.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


7:50

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8:1

8 Control system

Contents 8 Control system


8 Control system ...................................................................................................8:3
8.2 Monitoring ........................................................................................................8:6
8.2.2 Bypass ........................................................................................................8:6
8.2.3 Speed limitation...........................................................................................8:6
8.2.4 Service indicator..........................................................................................8:7
8.2.6 Height limitation...........................................................................................8:7
8.2.7 Height warning ............................................................................................8:7
8.3 Error codes ......................................................................................................8:8
8.4 Diagnostics ....................................................................................................8:10
8.4.1 CAN/POWER ............................................................................................8:13
8.4.2 LIGHTS .....................................................................................................8:14
8.4.3 CAB ...........................................................................................................8:15
8.4.4 CLIMATE ...................................................................................................8:15
8.4.5 HYD...........................................................................................................8:16
8.4.6 ENGINE ....................................................................................................8:17
8.4.7 TRANSM ...................................................................................................8:18
8.4.8 ELECTRIC SERVO ...................................................................................8:19
8.4.9 ATTACH ....................................................................................................8:20
8.4.10 OLS ...........................................................................................................8:22
8.4.11 EXTRA ......................................................................................................8:22
8.5 Settings ..........................................................................................................8:26

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – Control system 8:3

8 Control system
Control system, general
In many cases the machine's functions are controlled electrically. The
signals that control the machine are monitored to warn the operator or
limit the machine's functions in case of certain dangerous situations or
if there are malfunctions in the machine.

The function control system is divided into the following functions:


• Monitoring functions
• Error codes
• Diagnostics
• Settings
• Software

Monitoring functions describe the machine's monitoring functions that


warn the operator or limit the machine's functions in the event of a
dangerous situation.

Error codes notify operators and mechanics when malfunctions have


been detected.

Diagnostic test is tool for performing service and troubleshooting with


menus in the machine’s display.

Settings is the tool for setting and adapting the machine’s functions.

The software creates the functions in the control system.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:4 8 Control system – Control system

Control system, description


The machine is equipped with an electronic system used for
B C D
controlling and monitoring the machine’s different functions.

The system provides information to the operator in the form of alarm


information, operating information, and event-controlled information.
The information is shown on the steering wheel panel's display (C)
and on a panel for warning and indicator lights (B).

The function keys are used to navigate in the display menus for
service and troubleshooting, for example.

000053

A
A Function keys (KIT)
B Warning and indicator lights
C Display (KID)
D Alarm indicator
Function keys
Function keys

The function keys (A) are used to navigate in the menu system.
Also used to enter values in the system, change light contrast in the
keys/indicator panel, and to acknowledge warning.
000055

• Function key 1: Scroll anticlockwise in menu system as well as


enter value 1.
• Function key 2: Scroll clockwise in menu system as well as enter
value 2.
• Function key 3 (Reset): Abort selection of menu/session in
progress as well as enter value 3. Confirm alarm.
• Function key 4: Enter value 4, gradually adjust settings (for
example, contrast in guide lights for function keys) and gradually
change values in operating menus.
• Function key 5: Enter value 5, gradually adjust settings (for
example, contrast in guide lights for function keys) and gradually
change values in operating menus.
• Function key 6 (Return): Confirm selection of menu and
sub-menu, as well as confirm entered value.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – Control system 8:5

Operating menus
Operating menus

Operating menu Engine and transmission are shown in the display


1 2
when the machine is started. This menu is shown until another
U
menu is selected or an event-controlled menu is shown (e.g., in case
of error code of the type "WARNING" and "STOP"). Other menus
(see list below) are scrolled with the function keys 1 (arrow left) and
2 (arrow right).

The following operating menus are available to aid the operator:


• Operating menu engine and transmission
• Operating menu engine
• Operating menu transmission and hydraulics
• Operating menu electrical system
• Operating menu service

014252
• Operating menu heating and air conditioning
Examples of available operating menus • Operating menu statistics
• Operating menu container counter
• Operating menu load handling
• Operating menu service interval
• Operating menu printer
• Operating menu code lock

Event-controlled information

Under certain conditions, the control system calls the operator's


attention to important information with figures on the display. Examples
of warnings are warning for overloading when the overload system
is activated.
• Event menu start interlock
• Contact side lift attachment, twistlock
• Locked/unlocked twistlock
• Contact side lift attachment, hooks with lock lugs
• Open door
• Automatic spreading
Service menu
Service menu

The service menu is the gateway to the machine's diagnostic system.


Different parts of the Service menus are made available by pressing
"Enter" and entering different codes. The different service menus are:
000056

• Error codes, description, page 8:8


• Diagnostics, general, page 8:10
• Setup, general, page 8:26

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:6 8 Control system – Monitoring

8.2 Monitoring
Monitoring functions, general
The machine is equipped with a number of control functions to increase
safety during load handling:
• Bypass
• Speed limitation
• Service indicator

8.2.2 Bypass
Bypass, description
Bypass is activated with the bypass switch.

Bypassing the safety system makes it possible to:


• lock and open twistlocks without full contact
• Spread 20'-40' with locked twistlocks
• lower load with contact on side lift attachment
• manual control of recirculation damper by ECC or EHC
• release of parking brake in case of malfunction of switch parking
brake
• output signal to solenoid valves with active error codes
• machine engages neutral when no one is sitting in the driver's seat

WARNING
Safety interlocks blocked.
No safety system is engaged! Risk of tipping and rolling
over!
Only use bypassing in emergency situations!

8.2.3 Speed limitation


Speed limitation, description

Speed limitation prevents the machine's speed from exceeding pre-set


value by limiting gear position and engine rpm.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – Service indicator 8:7

8.2.4 Service indicator


Service indicator, resetting

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Navigate first to the service menu and press Enter.

000056
3 Enter code for resetting service indicator.
The code is obtained from Cargotec Support.
1 23
4 5 NOTE
000060

The code determines which service menu shall be activated


(Service, Diagnostics, Initiation or Calibration).

4 Reset the service indication by pressing Enter. NEXT SERVICE is


SERVICE INTERVALL changed to indicated interval.
NEXT SERVICE XXXXh To change duration of the service interval, set the desired interval
SERVICE INTERVALL with the plus and minus key.
STORED XXXXh
004908

PRESENT XXXXh

8.2.6 Height limitation


Height limitation, description

Height limitation is a part of the control and monitoring system and


prevents the machine from lifting higher than a pre-set height without
the operator being informed. Height limitation is adjustable according
to customer requirements.

8.2.7 Height warning


Height warning, description

Height warning alerts when the set maximum lifting height is reached.
Height warning is adjustable according to customer requirements.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:8 8 Control system – Error codes

8.3 Error codes


Error codes, description
When a malfunction occurs in the machine error messages (error
codes) are generated by the control unit in question that is sending the
error code via the CAN-bus to control unit KID (D795) that shows the
error codes on the display and stores the error codes.

Explanation of error codes is found in Operator's manual and Workshop


manual.
Error code indication

53 54 Error code indication

Error code is indicated with activate Indicator for active error codes
(position 36). Error codes are divided into three error code levels,
depending on how serious they are.

Error code levels are indicated as follows:


B • STOP is indicated with a STOP-sign on the display together
with a flashing red light from indicator for control and monitoring
system (position 54) and activated Indicator for active error codes
(position 36).
Error code with level STOP shown automatically on display.
36 • WARNING is indicated on the display, together with a flashing red
light for control and monitoring system (position 54) and activated
Indicator for active error codes (position 36).
Error code with level WARNING shown automatically on display.
• INFORMATION is indicated with activate Indicator for active error
codes (position 36).
Error code with level INFORMATION shown in error code list
under operating menu for service.
000348

B. Symbol error code level


36. Indicator active error codes
53. Display control system
54. Indicator for the control system
Error code display
Error code display

Error code information is shown with display figures in two ways:


• Automatically on display.
The error code is acknowledged with function key Reset (R).
003817

When the error code has been acknowledged the display returns
to previously selected menu. If the error code is active, it is stored
in the error code list under operating menu for service.
Example of automatic display figure
If the error code is active it is repeated to remind the operator
of the error status, stop every 3rd minute, warnings every 5th
minute.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – Error codes 8:9

• In the error code list under operating menu for service.


Active error codes are stored in the error code list. Navigate
to the operating menu for service. Show the error code list by
pressing in function key Enter for two seconds. Navigate in the
error code list with function key arrow right and arrow left. Exit
the error code list by pressing function key Reset (R).

001998
Example of display in error code list
NOTE
If error code isn’t included in the error code list, it may be due
to the following:
– condition for error detection no longer exists, e.g.,
control lever is released or engine is off.
– loose connection/poor contact.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:10 8 Control system – Diagnostics

8.4 Diagnostics
Diagnostics, general
The machine has built-in functions for troubleshooting called diagnostic
test. The diagnostic test consists of several menus that are shown in
the display. The menus are grouped for faster access.

The following pages show compilations of the diagnostic menus. The


workshop manual has a more detailed description of each diagnostic
menu.

The diagnostic test is divided into the following groups:


• CAN/POWER, menu overview, page 8:13
• LIGHTS, menu overview, page 8:14
• CAB, menu overview, page 8:15
• CLIMATE, menu overview, page 8:15
• HYD, menu overview, page 8:16
• ENGINE, menu overview, page 8:17
• TRANSM, menu overview, page 8:18
• ELECTRIC SERVO, menu overview, page 8:19
• ATTACH, menu overview, page 8:20
• OLS, menu overview, page 8:22
• EXTRA
– EL-STEERING, menu overview, page 8:23
– MOVE-CAB, menu overview, page 8:24
– OPT, menu overview, page 8:25
– RMI, menu overview, page 8:25

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – Diagnostics 8:11

Diagnostic menu, description


1 The diagnostic tests are built up of menus. The menus are grouped
2 3 4 according to logical areas. With the diagnostic menus it is possible to
read off how the control unit interprets input signals as well as what
7 DIAG CAB 2(X) output signals are sent by the control unit.
FRONT WIPER
SWITCH (1-3) 2 Signal values (position 6) in the menu indicate measured values by
5 the relevant control unit. The control units have internal voltmeters
OUTPUT 11 6

005592
FEEDBACK 0 and ammeters that measure the signal on the connectors out to
components or in from components.
1. DIAG = Diagnostic menus Output signals are control of solenoid valves, lights, relays, etc.
2. Menu group (CAB = cab functions)
Input signals are sensor signals, signals from controls and switches,
3. Menu number feedback control signals, etc.
4. Total number of menus in the loop. The number
of menus depends on how the machine is The figure shows an example of a menu, here for diagnostics of
equipped, which is why the number of menus is windshield wiper. The table below indicates what you can read out
indicated by (X) in this manual. from the menu figure.
5. Variable
6. Signal value
7. Menu heading

Pos. Designation Description


1 DIAG Indicates that diagnosis has been selected. There is also initiation (INIT) and calibration (CALIB).
2 CAB Indicates which menu group is selected. These groups are available:
CAN/POWER - for diagnosis of CAN-bus and electric power supply.
LIGHTS - for diagnosis of lighting and lights.
CAB - for diagnosis of components in cab.
CLIMATE - for diagnosis heat and ventilation system.
HYD - for diagnosis of common hydraulics and brakes.
ENGINE - for diagnosis of engine.
ELECTRIC SERVO - for diagnosis of lifting/lowering and tilt.
ATTACH - for diagnosis of attachment.
OLS - for diagnosis of overload system.
EXTRA - for diagnosis of optional functions.
3 2 Number of current menu (menu group CAB contains several menus in a loop).
4 (X) Total number of menus in group CAB. The number of menus depends on how the machine is
equipped, which is why the number of menus is indicated in this manual by (X).
5 Variable Which signal is being measured. Here are a few examples.
SWITCH refers to switch windshield wipers.
OUTPUT refers to status of a feed, in this case feed to the wiper motor.
FEEDBACK refers to feedback signal, in this case signal from the wiper motor when it operates.
6 Signal value Measuring value or status for the signal for the variable on the same line.
7 FRONT WIPER Name of the function that can be controlled. FRONT WIPER means front windshield wiper.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:12 8 Control system – Diagnostics

Diagnostics, operating instructions


To choose diagnostics, do the following:
1 Navigate to the service menu.
2 Push Enter.

000056
3 Enter the code for diagnostics.
The code is obtained from Cargotec Support.
1 23
4 5 NOTE
000060

The code determines which service menu shall be activated


(Service, Diagnostics, Initiation or Calibration).

4 Select group by scrolling with the arrow keys (1 and 2) and confirm
DIAGNOSIS with Enter.
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
Each group consists of a sequence of numbered menus. The first
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE menu for selected diagnostic menu is shown in the display, use
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH arrow keys (1 and 2) to change menu.
005263

OLS EXTRA

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – CAN/POWER 8:13

8.4.1 CAN/POWER
CAN/POWER, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG CAN/POWER 1(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 2(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 3(X)


PRESENT REDCAN STATUS PRESENT REDCAN STATUS PRESENT OPTION KDU
COMMUNICATION MODE X CONNECTED CITIES
NUMBERS OF UNITS X D797-1 D797-2 XX KDU D797-2 XY
SEGMENT ERROR X D795 D791-1 XX KDU D791-1 XY

DIAG CAN/POWER 4(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 5(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 6(X)


PRESENT DRIVE-TRAIN IGNITION EMERGENCY STOP, SW X
CAN BUS STATUS KEY IN X RELAY K3009-1 XY
ENGINE X RELAY K315-1 XY FEEDBACK X
TRANSMISSION X RELAY K315-2 XY RELAY K3009-2 XY

DIAG CAN/POWER 7(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 8(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 9(X)


790-1 CAB 790-1 CAB 795 DISPLAY
POWER XX.XXV 24V SENSOR SUPPLY XY
5V REF X.XXV 24V SUPPLY,RPM>500 XY RED.POWER LE X RI X

DIAG CAN/POWER 10(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 11(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 12(X)


797-1 FRAME 797-1 FRAME 793 TRANSMISSION
POWER XX.XXV POWER XX.XXV
RED.POWER LE X RI X 5V REF X.XXV IGNITION POWER XX.XXV
POWER 2 X SENSOR SUPPLY XX.XXV

DIAG CAN/POWER 13(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 14(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 15(X)


797-2 FRAME (OPT) 797-2 FRAME (OPT) 791-1 ATTACHMENT(OPT)
POWER XX.XXV 24V SENSOR SUPPLY XY EME POWER XX.XXV
RED.POWER LE X RI X 5V REF X.XXV RED.POWER LE X RI X
EME STOP POWER X EME POWER 2 X

DIAG CAN/POWER 16(X) DIAG CAN/POWER 17(X)


791-1 ATTACHMENT (OPT) REDCAN STATUS CHECK
24V SENSOR SUPPLY XY PRESS ENTER
5V REF X.XXV
007104

SEGMENT ERROR X

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:14 8 Control system – LIGHTS

8.4.2 LIGHTS
LIGHTS, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG LIGHTS 1(X) DIAG LIGHTS 2(X) DIAG LIGHTS 3(X)


MAIN LIGHT PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL HEAD LIGHTS
SWITCH X SWITCH X
SIDE LIGHTS XY HEAD LE/RI XY
REAR LIGHTS XY DIMMED LE/RI XY

DIAG LIGHTS 4(X) DIAG LIGHTS 5(X) DIAG LIGHTS 6(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL ROTATION BEACON
HAZARD SWITCH X HAZARD/FLASHER SWITCH X
FLASH.SW. LE X RI X LEFT F/R XY OUTPUT XY
RIGHT F/R XY

DIAG LIGHTS 7(X) DIAG LIGHTS 8(X) DIAG LIGHTS 9(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL CAB LIGHT
BRAKE LGT SWITCH X BRAKE LGT LE XY RI XY MANUAL SWITCH X
REVERSE LGT SIGNAL X REV. LGT LE XY RI XY DOOR SWITCH X
REVERSE ALARM XY OUTPUT XXX

DIAG LIGHTS 10(X) DIAG LIGHTS 11(X) DIAG LIGHTS 12(X)


WORKING LIGHT MAST WORKING LIGHT EXTRA WORKING LIGHT CAB
SWITCH X OUTPUT SWITCH X
OUTPUT LE/RI XY D797-1 C1 P42 XY
D797-2 C1 P42 XY OUTPUT 20' XY 40' XY

DIAG LIGHTS 13(X) DIAG LIGHTS 14(X) DIAG LIGHTS 15(X)


WORKING LIGHT ATTACH SWITCH LIGHTS STEP LIGHT
SWITCH X SWITCH X
OUTPUT LE XY RI XY OUTPUT XXX OUTPUT XXX
009154

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – CAB 8:15

8.4.3 CAB
CAB, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG CAB 1(X) DIAG CAB 2(X) DIAG CAB 3(X)


WASHER FRONT WIPER REAR WIPER
SWITCH X SWITCH (1-3) X SWITCH X
OUTPUT FRONT XY OUTPUT XY OUTPUT XY
OUTPUT REAR ROOF XY FEEDBACK X FEEDBACK X

DIAG CAB 4(X) DIAG CAB 5(X) DIAG CAB 6(X)


ROOF WIPER HORN BUZZER X
SWITCH X SWITCH X SWITCH SEAT X
OUTPUT XY SWITCH 2 X ALARM X
FEEDBACK X OUTPUT XY OP X

DIAG CAB 7(X) DIAG CAB 8(X)


FUEL SEAT HEATER
SENSOR VALUE XXXohm SWITCH X
PROC XXX OUTPUT XY

009155
8.4.4 CLIMATE
CLIMATE, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG CLIMATE 1(X) DIAG CLIMATE 2(X) DIAG CLIMATE 3(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL TEMP COIL XXX PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL
REQUIRED TEMP XXX TEMP COOLANT XXX PRESSURE SWITCH X
PRESENT TEMP XXX TEMP AMBIENT XXX
WATER VALVE FEEDB. XXX TEMP DE-ICE XXX

DIAG CLIMATE 4(X) DIAG CLIMATE 5(X) DIAG CLIMATE 6(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
WATER VALVE XX.XXV REQUIRED TEMP XX.XXV FAN SPEED XXX
DRAUGHT VALVE XX.XXV REQ. DRAUGHT XX.XXV RECIRKULATION XY
REQ. FAN SPEED XX.XXV COMPRESSOR XY

DIAG CLIMATE 7(X) DIAG CLIMATE 8(X)


OUTPUT WATER VALVE OUTPUT DRAUGHT VALVE
CLOCKWISE XY XY CLOCKWISE XY XY
ANTI-CLOCKWISE XY XY ANTI-CLOCKWISE XY XY
005596

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:16 8 Control system – HYD

8.4.5 HYD
HYD, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG HYDRAULIC 1(X) DIAG HYDRAULIC 2(X) DIAG HYDRAULIC 3(X)


HYDRAULIC OIL BRAKE COOLANT OIL HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
TEMP XXX TEMP XXX
FAN XY FAN XY LIFT CYLINDER XXX
SET OUTPUT +/- X SET OUTPUT +/- X TILT CYLINDER XXX

DIAG HYDRAULIC 4(X) DIAG HYDRAULIC 5(X) DIAG HYDRAULIC 6(X)


PRESSURE SWITCHES P-BRAKE CUT OFF HYDRAULIC
BRAKE PRESSURE X SWITCH X/Y PUMPS
BRAKE LIGHT PRESS. X FEEDBACK SWITCH X PUMP 2 XY
DECLUTCH PRESSURE X VALVE XY PUMP ATTACHMENT XY

DIAG HYDRAULIC 7(X) DIAG HYDRAULIC 8(X)


PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
EXTRA HYD PUMP PRESSURE TO ATTACHM.
VALVE XY VALVE XY

009156
SET OUTPUT +/- X SET OUTPUT +/- X

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – ENGINE 8:17

8.4.6 ENGINE
ENGINE, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG ENGINE 1(X) DIAG ENGINE 2(X) DIAG ENGINE 3(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL
ACCELERATOR X.XXV ENGINE SPEED EDC XXXX PRESENT TORQUE XXX
REQUIRED SPD PROC XXX ENGINE SPEED TCU XXXX REQUIRED TORQUE XXX
REQUIRED SPD RPM XXXX PRES TORQUE @ PRM XXX

DIAG ENGINE 4(X) DIAG ENGINE 5(X) DIAG ENGINE 6(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL
PREHEAT SWITCH X PREHEAT X OIL PRESSURE XX.X
CRANK ENGINE SWITCH X CRANK ENGINE CAN X BOOST PRESSURE XX.X
D+ X CRANK ENGINE WIRE XY OIL LEVEL XXX

DIAG ENGINE 7(X) DIAG ENGINE 8(X) DIAG ENGINE 9(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT EDC ERROR FUEL CONSUMPTION
OIL TEMP XXX NR OF ACT ERROR XX MOMENTARY l/h XXX
COOLANT TEMP XXX SPN XXXX
INTAKE MAIN.TEMP XXX FMI XX

DIAG ENGINE 10(X)


EATS STATUS
TANK LEVEL XX
TANK TEMP XX

014712
IND. SEVERITY XX

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:18 8 Control system – TRANSM

8.4.7 TRANSM
TRANSM, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG TRANSM. 1(X) DIAG TRANSM. 2(X) DIAG TRANSM. 3(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL SWITCHES PRESENT VALUE
BRAKE PEDAL X.XXV FORWARD X FORWARD X
DECLUTCH SWITCH X REVERSE X REVERSE X
DECLUTCH PRESS SW. X SHIFT MODE X GEAR X

DIAG TRANSM. 4(X) DIAG TRANSM. 5(X) DIAG TRANSM. 6(X)


OPERATING STATE OPERATING STATE DRUM SPEED XXXXHz
AUT/MAN MODE X SHIFT IN PROGRESS X OUTPUT SPEED XXXXHz
WARNING X FAULT X ENGINE SPEED XXXXHz
OPERATING MODE X OLD FAULT X TURBINE SPEED XXXXHz

DIAG TRANSM. 7(X) DIAG TRANSM. 8(X) DIAG TRANSM. 9(X)


OUTPUT STATUS FWD SUPPLY X FWD FEEDBACK XXXXmA
RSP DRIVE X X REV SUPPLY X REV FEEDBACK XXXXmA
2/4 VFS SELECTION X 2/4 SUPPLY X 2/4 FEEDBACK XXXXmA
1/3 VFS SELECTION X 1/3 SUPPLY X 1/3 FEEDBACK XXXXmA

DIAG TRANSM. 10(X) DIAG TRANSM. 11(X) DIAG TRANSM. 12(X)


PRESENT SENSOR INPUT PRESENT VALUE SPEED LIMIT
PRESS FEEDB. XXXXohm AXLE RATIO XXXXX SPD GEAR LOG
TRANSM.TEMP XXXXmV RADIUS XXXX CAB XX X XX
COOLER TEMP XXXXmV FRAME XX X XX

DIAG TRANSM. 13(X) DIAG TRANSM. 14(X)


ACT ERROR AREA XXX CONVERTER STATUS (Nm)
TYPE XXX TORQUE IMPELLER XXXX
NUMBER OF OCCU. XXXXX TORQUE TURBINE XXXX
009158

TIME AGO XXXXX

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – ELECTRIC SERVO 8:19

8.4.8 ELECTRIC SERVO


ELECTRIC SERVO, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG ELSERVO 1(X) DIAG ELSERVO 2(X) DIAG ELSERVO 3(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS OUTPUT LIFT
P1 XX.XXV P4 XX.XXV REFERENCE XY
P2 XX.XXV P7 XX.XXV REQUIRED VALUE XXXmA
P3 XX.XXV P5 XX.XXV FEEDBACK XXXmA

DIAG ELSERVO 4(X) DIAG ELSERVO 5(X) DIAG ELSERVO 6(X)


OUTPUT LOWER OUTPUT TILT IN OUTPUT TILT OUT
REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXXmA REQUIRED VALUE XXXmA REQUIRED VALUE XXXmA
FEEDBACK XXXmA FEEDBACK XXXmA FEEDBACK XXXmA

DIAG ELSERVO 7(X) DIAG ELSERVO 8(X) DIAG ELSERVO 9(X)


NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED

DIAG ELSERVO 10(X) DIAG ELSERVO 11(X) DIAG ELSERVO 12(X)


NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED

DIAG ELSERVO 13(X) DIAG ELSERVO 14(X) DIAG ELSERVO 15(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS REGENERATION STATUS
SPREADER IN X OUT X OPTION LOCKING X INPUT DAMPING X
PISTOL X LEVELLING LOCKING X OUTPUT LEFT XY
007105

UNLOCK TW X OUTPUT RIGHT XY

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:20 8 Control system – ATTACH

8.4.9 ATTACH
ATTACH, menu overview
For side lift attachment with hook locking

DIAGNOSIS DIAG ATTACHMENT 1(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 2(X)


CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE P3 XX.XXV P5 XX.XXV
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH P4 XX.XXV
OLS EXTRA P7 XX.XXV

DIAG ATTACHMENT 3(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 4(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 5(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS
SPREADER IN X OUT X LOCK CONT X
AUTO 20/40 X PISTOL X UNLOCK CONT X
30/35 STOP X

DIAG ATTACHMENT 6(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 7(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 8(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS
LE RI ALIGNMENT LE RI LE RI
LOW SPEED 20/40 X X UPPER X X LOCKED CONT X X
30/35 STOP X X LOWER X X UNLOCKED CONT X X

DIAG ATTACHMENT 9(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 10(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 11(X)


PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SIDESHIFT LE
LOCK CONT XY IND. LOCKED CONT XY REFERENCE XY
UNLOCK CONT XY IND. UNLOCKED CONT XY REQUIRED VALUE XXX
IND. ALIGNMENT XY FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG ATTACHMENT 12(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 13(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 14(X)


OUTPUT SIDESHIFT RI OUTPUT LEVELLING CW OUTPUT LEVELLING CCW
REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX
FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG ATTACHMENT 15(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 16(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 17(X)


NOT USED NOT USED OUTPUT SPREAD LE OUT
REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX
FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG ATTACHMENT 18(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 19(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 20(X)


OUTPUT SPREADER LE IN OUTPUT SPREAD RI OUT OUTPUT SPREADER RI IN
REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX
FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG ATTACHMENT 21(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 22(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 23(X)


PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
DETECT UPPER CONT. IND. UPPER
BUZZER AUTO 20-40 XY LE RI ALIGNMENT XY
009159

X X

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – ATTACH 8:21

ATTACH, menu overview


For side lift attachment with twistlock locking

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG ATTACHMENT 1(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 2(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 3(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS
P3 XX.XXV P5 XX.XXV SPREADER IN X OUT X
P4 XX.XXV AUTO 20/40 X
P7 XX.XXV 30/35 STOP X

DIAG ATTACHMENT 4(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 5(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 6(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS
LOCK CONT X LE RI
PISTOL X UNLOCK CONT X LOW SPEED 20/40 X X
30/35 STOP X X

DIAG ATTACHMENT 7(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 8(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 9(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT INPUT SIGNALS PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
ALIGNMENT LE RI LE RI LOCK CONT XY
X X LOCKED CONT X X UNLOCK CONT XY
UNLOCKED CONT X X

DIAG ATTACHMENT 10(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 11(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 12(X)


PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SIDESHIFT LE OUTPUT SIDESHIFT RI
IND. LOCKED CONT XY REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
IND. UNLOCKED CONT XY REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX
IND. ALIGNMENT XY FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG ATTACHMENT 13(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 14(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 15(X)


OUTPUT LEVELLING CW OUTPUT LEVELLING CCW NOT USED
REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX
FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG ATTACHMENT 16(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 17(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 18(X)


NOT USED OUTPUT SPREAD LE OUT OUTPUT SPREADER LE IN
REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX
FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG ATTACHMENT 19(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 20(X) DIAG ATTACHMENT 21(X)


OUTPUT SPREAD RI OUT OUTPUT SPREADER RI IN PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX BUZZER AUTO 20-40 XY
009160

FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:22 8 Control system – OLS

8.4.10 OLS
OLS, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAG OLS 1(X) DIAG OLS 2(X) DIAG OLS 3(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL VD VALUE XXXXXKg
PRESENT LOAD XXXXXKg
LIFT CYLINDER X.XXV BY-PASS X
TILT CYLINDER X.XXV MAST POS SENSOR X

DIAG OLS 4(X) DIAG OLS 5(X) DIAG OLS 6(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT ACT LIFT (HYD) OUTPUT ACT LOWER (HYD)
TILT ANGLE LIM X REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
HEIGHT LIM X REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX
FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG OLS 7(X)


PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
TILT (HYD)
TILT ACTIVE XY

009162
8.4.11 EXTRA
8.4.11.1 VBFS

VBFS, menu overview


Not used.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – EXTRA 8:23

8.4.11.2 EL-STEERING

EL-STEERING, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAGNOSIS EXTRA
VBFS EL-STEERING
EXT-ATTACH FREELIFT
MOVE-CAB OPT I/O RMI

DIAG STEERING 1(X) DIAG STEERING 2(X) DIAG STEERING 3(X)


PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL SWITCHES PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL
SIGNAL 1 P6 X.XXV ON/OFF X HORN X
SIGNAL 2 P7 X.XXV FORWARD X STEER.WHEEL CUT OFF X
LOGIC X.XXV REVERSE X

DIAG STEERING 4(X) DIAG STEERING 5(X)


OUTPUT STEERING LEFT OUTPUT STEERING RIGHT
REFERENCE XY REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX REQUIRED VALUE XXX

009163
FEEDBACK XXX FEEDBACK XXX

8.4.11.3 EXT-ATTACH

EXT-ATTACH, menu overview


Not used.

8.4.11.4 FREELIFT

FREELIFT, menu overview


Not used.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:24 8 Control system – EXTRA

8.4.11.5 MOVE-CAB

MOVE-CAB, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAGNOSIS EXTRA
VBFS EL-STEERING
EXT-ATTACH FREELIFT
MOVE-CAB OPT I/O RMI

DIAG MOVE-CAB 1(X) DIAG MOVE-CAB 2(X) DIAG MOVE-CAB 3(X)


INPUT SWITCHES PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL PRESENT INPUT SIGNAL
UP/RIGHT X AUTO CABTILT X CAB UPPER POS X
DOWN/LEFT X LIFT HEIGHT POS X CAB LOWER POS X
OPEN DOORS X

DIAG MOVE-CAB 4(X) DIAG MOVE-CAB 5(X) DIAG MOVE-CAB 6(X)


PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT RIGHT
VALVE CAB UP XY ACTIVATE SLID-CAB XY REFERENCE XY
VALVE CAB DOWN XY REQUIRED VALUE XXX
FEEDBACK XXX

DIAG MOVE-CAB 7(X)


OUTPUT LEFT
REFERENCE XY
REQUIRED VALUE XXX

009164
FEEDBACK XXX

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


8 Control system – EXTRA 8:25

8.4.11.6 OPT

OPT, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAGNOSIS EXTRA
VBFS EL-STEERING
EXT-ATTACH FREELIFT
MOVE-CAB OPT I/O RMI

DIAG OPTION 1(X) DIAG OPTION 2(X) DIAG OPTION 3(X)


OPTION SWITCH PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
S199-1 X S199-4 X CENTRAL LUBRICATION D797-1 C1 P42 XY
S199-2 X FRAME XY
S199-3 X ATTACHMENT XY

DIAG OPTION 4(X) DIAG OPTION 5(X)


PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL PRESENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
D797-2 C1 P28 XY D791-1 C1 P14 XY
D797-2 C1 P42 XY D791-1 C1 P28 XY

009165
8.4.11.7 I/O

I/O, menu overview


Not used.

8.4.11.8 RMI

RMI, menu overview

DIAGNOSIS
CAN/POWER LIGHTS CAB
CLIMATE HYD ENGINE
TRANSM ELSERV ATTACH
OLS EXTRA

DIAGNOSIS EXTRA
VBFS EL-STEERING
EXT-ATTACH FREELIFT
MOVE-CAB OPT I/O RMI

DIAG RMI 1(X) DIAG RMI 2(X) DIAG RMI 3(X)


MIU SW VER XXXX.XXXX SIGNAL QUALITY ERROR XX.XX.XX.XX
MIU TIME XX.XX.XX GSM XXX GPRS XXX ERR.VALID XX.XX.XX.XX
WLAN XXX RADIO XXX ACT ERR XX.XX.XX.XX
009166

SMS XXX: UNS.DATA XXX

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


8:26 8 Control system – Settings

8.5 Settings
Setup, general
Settings offer the option of adapting the properties of the functions
for each unique machine. Settings are entered via the menus in the
display. Settings options are divided into sections such as Initiations
and Calibrations

Initiation is performed before the machine is put into operation. This


is done to compensate for mechanical and electrical tolerance values
(variations between different machines).

Calibration should be performed to optimise the use of important


functions. Certain functions require calibration in order to operate.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9:1

9 Frame, body, cab and accessories

Contents 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories ...................................................................9:3
9.1 Controls and instruments .................................................................................9:4
9.2 Safety and emergency equipment .................................................................9:10
9.3 Seats.............................................................................................................. 9:11
9.4 Heating, ventilation and air conditioning ........................................................9:14
9.4.1 Fresh air filter ............................................................................................9:26
9.4.8 Condenser.................................................................................................9:27
9.4.9 Moisture filter.............................................................................................9:27
9.5 Wiper/washer system.....................................................................................9:29
9.6 Lighting system ..............................................................................................9:30
9.7 Signalling system ...........................................................................................9:33
9.8 Entertainment and communication ................................................................9:35
9.9 Glass/windows/mirrors...................................................................................9:36
9.9.3 Roof window..............................................................................................9:36
9.9.5 Rearview mirror .........................................................................................9:36
9.10 Cab structure and suspension .......................................................................9:37
9.10.2 Doors.........................................................................................................9:37
9.10.3 Cab undercarriage ....................................................................................9:38
9.10.4 Cab tilt .......................................................................................................9:38
9.11 Cab interior ....................................................................................................9:41
9.12 Frame.............................................................................................................9:42
9.13 Body structure................................................................................................9:43
9.14 Central lubrication ..........................................................................................9:44
9.15 Paint/coatings ................................................................................................9:46

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Frame, body, cab and accessories 9:3

9 Frame, body, cab and


accessories
Frame, body, cab and accessories,
description
The machine consists of frame, body and cab.

The frame (chassis) is the machine's structural part and is made of


high-strength steel.

The body consists of fenders, hood, tanks and other parts mounted on
the frame.

The cab is built separately and isolated from the frame using
heavy-duty rubber dampers. Driver's seat, steering wheel, and control
lever for hydraulics can be adjusted for optimal individual operating
position. Effective insulation gives a minimum of vibrations and a low
sound level. The machine is equipped with heating and ventilation, air
condition is available as an option.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:4 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Controls and instruments

9.1 Controls and instruments


Controls and instruments, overview
Overview
Overview

1 2 3 4 5

15

12 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

008108
14

1. Left-hand dashboard panel


2. Gear and multi-function lever (S162)
3. Steering wheel panel
4. Steering wheel
5. Switch direction indicators (S161)
6. Panel for hydraulic functions
7. Emergency stop switch (S250)
8. Switch for parking brake (S107)
9. Hydraulic control
10. Driver's seat
11. Accelerator pedal (B690)
12. Brake pedals
13. Declutch pedal (S220-1)
14. Electronic box with fuses and relays
15. Hour meter (P708)
A Joystick or mini-wheel

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Controls and instruments 9:5

Left-hand dashboard panel


Left-hand dashboard panel
16. Switch fan (S118)
17. Switch heat (S117)
24..28 29 30 31 18. Switch air distribution (S139)
19. Switch work lights cab roof (S105-1)
19..23
Extra work lights front fender
18 20. Switch working lights carriage and attachment (S105-2)

004394
17
16 Extra working lights attachment and carriage
Left-hand dashboard panel 21. Switch working lights mast (S105-3)
Extra working lights mast
22. Switch rotating beacon (S110)
23. Switch hazard lights (S109)
24. Switch headlights (S100)
25. Switch seat heater (S143)
(Can be in driver's seat)
26. Switch for electrically-heated rearview mirrors (S199-4)
27. Spare
28. Switch for supplemental heater (S199-1)
29. Spare
30. Spare
31. Socket 12 VDC

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:6 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Controls and instruments

Steering wheel panel


Steering wheel panel
36
35
34 32. Warning lamp for low battery charge
33
32 33. Warning lamp for low brake pressure
34. Indicator for active error codes
35. Warning lamp for bypass of hydraulic functions
36. Indicator light for activated lever or mini-wheel steering
37..41 49 37. Warning lamp for high coolant temperature
38. Warning lamp for low oil pressure engine
42..46 39. Indicator light for preheating
47 48 40. Warning lamp for low coolant level engine
41. Warning lamp for high oil temperature transmission
42. Warning lamp for low fuel level
43. Warning lamp for high temperature hydraulic oil
50 51 52 53 44. Indicator light for high beam
45. Indicator light for travel direction
46. Indicator light for parking brake
47. Indicator light for locked twistlock/lock lug (secured load)
48. Indicator light for contact (attachment / load)
49. Indicator light for unlocked twistlock/lock lug (load released)
50. Panel for warning and indicator lights
51. Display for control and monitoring system
64
54 52. Indicator for control and monitoring system
63 53. Ignition key lock
55
62 54. Switch for defroster
56
55. Switch for windshield wiper roof, interval
008132

61 60 59 58 57
56. Switch for windshield wiper roof, continuous
Steering wheel panel 57. Switch for interior lighting
58. Switch for windshield wiper rear, interval
59. Switch for windshield wiper rear, continuous
60. Function keys for control and monitoring system
61. Driving direction indicator, Forward Neutral Reverse
62. Shifting program A, automatic shifting
63. Shifting program 1, locked to gear position one
64. Shifting program 2, locked to gear position two

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Controls and instruments 9:7

Panel for hydraulic functions

65 Panel for hydraulic functions


66
67 65. Lift/lower (R8071)
68 66. Tilt (R8072)
69 67. Side shift (R8073)
68. Levelling (R8074)
70
69. Opening of twistlock/ Opening and locking of lock lugs
(attachment) (S1002)
71 70. Switch for horn (S149)
72 71. Switch for twistlock/lock lugs, automatic / manual locking (S1003)
73
74 72. Switch for spreading 20'-40' (S1012)
75
73. Switch for spreading stop at 30' or 35' (S1004)
76
77 74. Spare
008130 75. Switch for automatic / manual cab tilt (S199-2)
76. Switch for manual cab tilt (S1010)
8 78 79 78 77. Switch for automatic spreading 20'-40' (S1012-2)
Panel for hydraulic functions and control levers, electric 78. Switch for by-pass of hydraulic functions (S1005)
servo
Key for bypass of hydraulic functions
79. Switch for control switch (S250)
69
75
71
73
76
78

77
008131

78 8 79 70

Panel for hydraulic functions and control lever

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:8 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Controls and instruments

Operating menus, overview

1 2 3 4

9 8 7 6

10

014713
11 12 13 14
1. Operating menu engine and transmission 8. Operating menu service
2. Operating menu engine 9. Operating menu heating and air conditioning
3. Operating menu for oil temperature 10. Operating menu code lock
4. Operating menu electrical system 11. Operating menu statistics, operating hours
5. Operating menu container counter 12. Operating menu statistics, fuel consumption
6. Operating menu service interval 13. Operating menu statistics, driving distance
7. Operating menu statistics 14. Operating menu statistics, lift statistics

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Controls and instruments 9:9

Event menus overview


Event menus overview

Side lift attachment with twistlock locking

1 2 3 4

009176
1. Event menu start interlock
2. Event menu contact twistlock
3. Event menu twistlocks
4. Event menu open door
5. Event menu automatic spreading
Event menus overview
Event menus overview

Side lift attachment with side lock lugs

1 2 3 4

009781
1. Event menu start interlock
2. Event menu contact
3. Event menu open door
4. Event menu automatic spreading

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:10 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Safety and emergency equipment

9.2 Safety and emergency equipment


Safety and emergency equipment, description
A good working environment has safety and emergency equipment to
make the operator's work safe. The machine may be equipped with
the following equipment.

4 6,7,8,11 2

10

1, 8

008394
5 3
1. Reverse alarm 8. Camera with monitor , used to give better visibility
to the rear when operating the machine. The monitor
2. Revolving beacon
is located inside the cab on the left side.
3. Horn
9. External rearview mirrors, used to provide increased
4. Electrically powered loud horn visibility when manoeuvring and handling loads and
show glimpses of the area around the side of the
5. Fire extinguisher (located outside or inside cab) machine.
If the machine is supplied with a fire extinguisher, it 10. Blinking brake lights when reversing
should be of the type ABE according to EN 3 pt. 1, 2,
4 and 5. With such a fire extinguisher, it is possible 11. Control switch for load handling (servo circuits)
to extinguish fires in both solid organic materials and
Breaks all transmission of power and control signals
fluids. Adapted fire extinguishing equipment can be
to the hydraulics.
ordered from Cargotec.
6. Seat belt 12. Emergency exit cab, right door or rear window
(not positioned in figure).
7. Buzzer in cab to indicate alarm or forgotten action,
e.g., if the operator leaves the cab without first
applying the parking brake.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Seats 9:11

9.3 Seats
Seats, description (product alternative standard
seat)
The function of the seat is to give the operator a good sitting position
and contribute to a good working environment. The cab's seat has
several adjustment features and meets high comfort requirements.
1 2 The seat has the following equipment:
• mechanical adjustment
3 • armrest right
• seat belt
• armrest left
4
• seat heating
• head restraint

8 6
006825

7
Controls for standard seat
1. Adjustable lower back (lumbar) support
2. Adjustable arm rest, right
3. Adjustable arm rest, left
4. Adjustable tilt, backrest
5. Adjustable suspension position
6. Adjustable seat angle
7. Adjustable seat height
8. Longitudinal adjustment

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:12 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Seats

Seats, description (product alternative BE- GE


9120)

BE-GE 9120 is the same seat as the standard seat but equipped with
1 2 air suspension. The air suspension automatically adapts the seat
height and suspension to the operator's weight. The air suspension
is supplied by a special compressor installed on the underside of
3 the cab.

The function of the seat is to give the operator a good sitting position
and contribute to a good working environment. The cab's seat has
4 several adjustment features and meets high comfort requirements.

The seat has the following equipment:


• mechanical adjustment
• air suspension (with external compressor)
5 • armrest right
• seat belt

8 • armrest left
6
006826

7 • seat heating
Controls BE-GE 9120 • head restraint
1. Adjustable lower back (lumbar) support
2. Adjustable arm rest, right
3. Adjustable arm rest, left
4. Adjustable tilt, backrest
5. Adjustable suspension position
6. Adjustable seat angle
7. Adjustable seat height
8. Longitudinal adjustment

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Seats 9:13

Seat, description (product alternative


Isringhausen 6800)

The function of the seat is to give the operator a good sitting position
and contribute to a good working environment. The cab's seat has
several adjustment features and meets high comfort requirements.

Isringhausen 6800 seat has the following equipment:


• head restraint
• armrest
• air suspension (with external compressor)
• air-adjusted lower back (lumbar) support
• seat belt
• seat heating

11

10

34 567
004691

9 8 2
Controls Isringhausen 6800
1. Longitudinal adjustment
2. Adjustable seat
3. Seat height lowering
4. Seat tilt
5. Seat height raising
6. Backrest tilt
7. Adjustable suspension
8. Seat heating
9. Level damping, On/Off
10. Adjustable lower back (lumbar) support
11. Arm rest

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:14 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning

9.4 Heating, ventilation and air


conditioning
Heating and ventilation unit, function description
(product alternative EHC)
The heating and ventilation unit (EHC) handles heating and
ventilation. (The heating and ventilation unit cannot add cooling.)

The temperature in the cab is thermostat-controlled by Control unit


cab (D790-1). The cab temperature is controlled compared to set
temperature. The temperature can be set between 16 and 28 ºC. The
system is operated with controls on the instrument panel.

The heating and ventilation system used heat from the engine's
cooling system via a heater to warm the outdoor air. Outdoor air is
forced by the fan through the heater and on through channels in the
cab's interior, and is then directed at, e.g., the windshield (defroster)
or the feet.

At the air inlet before the cab fan there is a filter that cleans the air
before it is forced into the machine.
001839

The heating and ventilation unit can:


• add fresh air to the cab
Defroster nozzles • clean the air from impurities
• warm the air when it is cold
• defrost the windows (defroster function)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning 9:15

1 2 3 17
D D 16

D
4 ˚C D
D
˚C
D 6
7 D
D790-1 D790-2 D795

15 D
11
M D794
M
14 D 10
˚C
5 M ˚C 9
D D 8 12
13
M

009891
1. Switch fan (S118) 10. Control unit engine (D794)
2. Switch temperature (S117) 11. Water valve (Y673)
3. Switch air distribution (S139) 12. Heat exchanger
4. Sensor cab temperature (B775-1) 13. Actuator recirculation (M612)
5. Sensor temperature outlet fan (B775-2) 14. Fan motor heat (M657)
6. Sensor outdoor temperature (B774) 15. Damper motor (Y672)
7. Control unit cab (D790-1) 16. Switch defroster on Control unit KIT (D790-2)
8. Engine 17. Operating menu on Control unit KID (D795)
9. Sensor engine temperature

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:16 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning

Air conditioning, function description (product


alternative ECC)

Air conditioning is available as an option to the heating unit, this


combination is called (ECC) and handles heating, ventilation, cooling,
and dehumidification.

The temperature in the cab is thermostat-controlled by Control unit


cab (D790-1). The cab temperature is controlled compared to set
temperature. The temperature can be set between 16 and 28 ºC. The
system is operated with controls on the instrument panel.

For cooling, the compressor that compresses the refrigerant is


activated. Refrigerant is evaporated in the evaporator in the cab.
When the refrigerant is evaporated, cold is then generated in the
evaporator. The outdoor air is cooled when it is forced through the
evaporator by the cab fan. Then the air can be directed in the same
way as for the heating system.
001839

The air conditioning adds the following functions to the heating and
Defroster nozzles ventilation unit:
• dehumidification of the air when it is humid
• cooling of the air when it is warm

As an option for the air conditioning there is automatic shut-off


of cooling when the door is open. This means that cooling is turned
off when a door is open. Cooling is activated again when the door
is closed. The air conditioning has a delay of 45 seconds between
cut-off and cut-in.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning 9:17

2 1 3 26
D D 25

D
4 °C D
D
°C
6
7 D790-1 D790-2 D795

D D D797-1
16
D D794
15 D
12
M D D
14 22 23
5 °C Pa °C
M D
D 19 21
13 20 C 24
M 18
17
D

D 9

M
°C
8 11
10

007690
1. Switch temperature (S117) 15. Damper motor (Y672)
2. Switch fan (S118) 16. Control unit frame (D797-1)
3. Switch air distribution (S139) 17. Magnetic clutch (M645)
4. Sensor cab temperature (B775-1) 18. Compressor
5. Sensor temperature outlet fan (B775-2) 19. Condenser
6. Sensor outdoor temperature (B774) 20. Moisture filter
7. Control unit cab (D790-1) 21. Pressure switch (S246)
8. Engine 22. Expansion valve
9. Water valve (Y673) 23. Sensor temperature in refrigerant circuit (B775-3)
10. Sensor engine temperature 24. Heat exchanger for cooling
11. Heat exchanger 25. Switch defroster on Control unit KIT (D790-2)
12. Control unit engine (D794) 26. Operating menu on Control unit KID (D795)
13. Actuator recirculation (M612)
14. Fan motor heat (M657)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:18 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and air conditioning,


component location

1 2 3

16
15

13

6
7
12
8
11

005221
10 9, 14
1. Operating menu on Control unit KID (D795) 10. Cab fan (M657)
2. Switch defroster on Control unit KIT (D790-2) 11. Fresh air and recirculation damper (M612)
3. Sensor outdoor temperature (B774) 12. Fresh air filter
4. Control unit cab (D790-1) 13. Heat exchanger (cold and heat)
5. Sensor cab temperature (B775-1) (inside of the left 14. Sensor temperature refrigerant (B775-3)
control panel, behind a grating)
(located the copper pipe inside the expansion valve)
6. Switch air distribution (S139)
15. Air distributor (Y672)
7. Switch temperature (S117)
16. Sensor temperature outlet fan (B775-2) (in air
8. Switch fan (S118) distributor)
9. Expansion valve

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning 9:19

2 3

4
5

014731
7

1. Magnetic clutch compressor (M645) 5. Pressure switch (S246)


2. Compressor 6. Sight glass
3. Water valve (Y673) 7. Condenser
4. Moisture filter

General recommendations for work on the air


conditioning unit

CAUTION
Authorisation is required to perform repairs on the
climate control unit.

WARNING
If there is a rupture of a cooling hose or leakage on the
plant – turn off the unit immediately.
It is dangerous to allow refrigerants to come in contact
with skin or eyes.
Never release refrigerant in a closed rum; the gas can
cause asphyxiation in, for example, pits.
Never weld on or near a closed cooling system.
Empty refrigerant during repairs on the air conditioning.
Work may only be performed on the refrigerant circuit
by an accredited company.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:20 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning

WARNING
Electric fans can injure hands.
Risk of personal injury.
Avoid placing hands near the cooling fans when the
engine is running.

Air conditioning, checking/performance test

NOTE
The air conditioning does not work at temperatures below approx.
0 ºC since the pressure in the refrigerant circuit is too low. If the
pressure in the refrigerant circuit becomes too low the low pressure
switch cuts off power supply to the compressor's magnet clutch,
which means that the air conditioning stops working.

Should be performed during continuous operation every week from


early spring to late autumn as well as in winter during long periods
of high humidity.

In winter, during cold and dry periods of low operation, the compressor
should be run for a few minutes every week so that the rubber hoses,
couplings, gaskets and axle seals are lubricated.
1 Check that the condenser is not clogged – clean condenser fins
with compressed air as needed.

2 Check that the compressor turns on and off without error.

3 Check that the drain for the cooling element's condensation water
is not clogged.

4 Check that there is no refrigerant leakage. In case of leakage, oil


and gas often form a dusty, dirty spot.

5 Start the engine and engage the cooling function with setting on
maximum cooling.
Let the engine run at min. 1,500 rpm. (At temperatures below
approx. 0 ºC, the cooling function will not start due to low pressure
in the system.)

6 Set the fan to intermediate speed.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning 9:21

7 After running for 10 minutes, check that there are no bubbles


visible in the receiver dryer's sight glass. (Bubbles should occur
only when the compressor starts and stops).
8 Place a thermometer by the air vent closest to the evaporator. After
5-10 minutes, the temperature should be under 10 ºC. (Deviations
in the measurement result can occur if the performance test is
conducted when the ambient temperature is below approx. 18 ºC).
If bubbles occur, subsequent filling should be done by an expert.

013669

Check the temperatures on the hoses and similar items


as follows:
1 Check that the hoses and components on the pressure side have
roughly the same temperature by feeling them with your hand.

NOTE
In the event of a stop in one of cooling circuit's components, and
during long-term operation, certain parts (possibly hoses before
the condenser) can be very hot. Risk of burn injuries.

2 All hoses and components on the pressure side (from the


compressor to the expansion valve) should be warm.

3 All hoses and components on the suction side (from the evaporator
to the compressor) should be cold.

4 Check the expansion valve. Frost or cold temperatures on


the intake side indicate that it is defective or clogged and that
circulation is limited or stopped on the pressure side.

5 Check that the compressor cuts in and out normally. Run the
cab fan at low speed and let the compressor work at high rpm.
When the temperature in the air vents nozzles is close to 0 ºC,
the compressor cuts out via the thermostat or ECC and cuts in
again when the temperature has increased approx. 3-7 ºC. (If the
compressor does not cut out, there is a risk of the evaporator icing
up and cooling performance decreasing.)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:22 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning

WARNING
If there is a rupture of a cooling hose or leakage on the
plant – turn off the unit immediately.
It is dangerous to allow refrigerants to come in contact
with skin or eyes.
Never release refrigerant in a closed rum; the gas can
cause asphyxiation in, for example, pits.
Never weld on or near a closed cooling system.
Empty refrigerant during repairs on the air conditioning.
Work may only be performed on the refrigerant circuit
by an accredited company.

Refrigerant amount, checking


Using the sight glass an estimation of the correct amount of refrigerant
can be checked. Normally it should not be possible to see bubbles
when the air conditioning system is operating. Bubbles may appear if
the plant contains the wrong amount of refrigerant, in connection with
the compressor stopping and starting, and if the condenser is defective
or at very high ambient temperature.

It is easiest to confirm bubbles if you observe the sight glass at the


same time as the compressor starts. Then bubbles are usually seen
from a few seconds after the compressor has started, until the system
starts to work normally.

NOTE
Reliable checking of refrigerant quantity through the sight glass can
only be performed when the ambient temperature is above approx.
15 ºC.

Sight glass inspection


1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Start the engine and let it idle.

3 Switch on the air conditioning with max. cooling and fan.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning 9:23

4 Check that no bubbles are visible in the sight glass on the particle
and moisture filter.
Bubbles in the glass means that the quantity of refrigerant is
incorrect or that the condenser is defective, clogged by, e.g., dust,
or that the ambient temperature is very high.

013669

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:24 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning

Action in the event of leakage in the system


1 Turn off the air conditioning.

2 Check the cooling plant and pinpoint leaks. For this purpose, use
special leak detection equipment. If there still is refrigerant left,
the remaining refrigerant amount shall be evacuated and then
measured.

3 Rectify faults, seal leaks by replacing gaskets, hoses, etc.

4 Fill with the correct quantity of R134a refrigerant according to the


following points when all defects have been repaired.

5 The following work requires special filling equipment.

6 Connect the suction pressure gauge's blue hose to the service


valve on the compressor's suction side marked with S, SUC or
SUCTION.

7 Connect the pressure gauge's red hose to the service valve on the
compressor's pressure side marked with D, DIS or DISCHARGE.

8 Connect the hoses to the fluid reservoir.

9 Connect the yellow filler and vacuum hose to the nitrogen tube.
Open the cock on the tube and then the cock on the pressure
side. Open the valve on the cylinder and then the valve on the
pressure side. Now the gas flows through the system and back
to the suction side of the compressor, which can be seen on the
blue pressure gauge which slowly indicates a pressure equivalent
to the pressure in the cylinder (see red pressure gauge). (If the
blue pressure gauge does not move then there is a stop in the
system.) Turn off the valve on the pressure side and then the
cock on the tube.

10 Now the system contains a mix of nitrogen gas and air. This gas
amount is enough to indicate a leak.

11 Conduct leakage detection of all hose nipples and other


connections by applying leakage indicator around all sealing
surfaces and check whether gas bubbles arise.

12 Loosen the yellow hose from the nitrogen tube and connect it to
the vacuum pump.

13 Start the vacuum pump and open the cock on the suction side
very carefully, otherwise the oil is blown out of the vacuum pump.
Then, open the cock on the pressure side, use vacuum suction
for at least 30 minutes. Preferably longer.

14 First close both cocks on the pressure gauge set. Then turn off
the vacuum pump. Work in this order, otherwise the air will rush
back. Wait approx. 15 min and check on the pressure gauges that
the vacuum does not change.

15 Move the yellow hose to the refrigerant cylinder and open the cock
on the cylinder.

16 Bleed the yellow hose by unloading the service connection at the


manometer set until pure gas flows out.

17 Open the cock on the suction side and allow the gas to flow
around until the pressure gauges indicate the same pressure as
in the tube.

18 Start the compressor and set the cooling thermostat and fan to
max.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Heating, ventilation and air conditioning 9:25

19 Open the cock on the pressure side and let the compressor suck
from the tube. Observe the sight glass. At the beginning the
fluid is mixed with a lot of bubbles. The longer the compressor
sucks, there will be less bubbles and the fluid will be clearer.
If the bubbles suddenly disappear the cooling thermostat has
probably cut out. Bypass the thermostat using a cable directly
from the connection 24 V or wait until the thermostat cuts in again.
Continue until the correct refrigerant amount has been reached.

NOTE
Directly bypassing the compressor's coupling magnet can lead
to compressor damage caused by incorrect refrigerant quantity.

Close the cock on the suction side and then the cock on the tube.
Disconnect the service hoses from the compressor and install
the protective caps. Check for leaks according to step 11 or with
a special leak detector.
20 In case of overfilling, the pressure and temperature increase
slowly until the high-pressure monitor cuts off the current to the
013669

compressor's electromagnet. This is due to the refrigerant rushing


around in the system without being evaporated or condensed in
the condenser. The result is that the cold in the cooling coil is
lost and high heat is generated in the condenser. Also, a steady
stream of bubbles can be seen in the sight glass. Return to step 2.
21 In case of underfilling or a lack of refrigerant, bubbles appear in
the sight glass - return to step 2.

Compressor cooling oil


22 At delivery, the compressor is filled with cooling oil. Under normal
conditions the oil should not be changed or refilled. In the event
of suspected incorrect oil quantity, see the instruction: "When
replacing the compressor."
In case of refrigerant loss there may also be oil loss, since
approx. 25% of the oil volume is absorbed by the refrigerant.
Recommended oil types that may be used are shown in the
section F Technical data.

When replacing the compressor


23 The compressor is filled with cooling oil when delivered. When
changing cooling compressor, change the oil as follows:
• Drain the defective compressor of oil and measure the
quantity.
• Then drain the new compressor of oil and refill with the same
amount that was drained from the defective compressor. For
oil volume in the system, see section F Technical data.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:26 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Fresh air filter

Supplemental heater, description

1
Supplemental heater, an option for the heating unit, uses excess heat
in the engine's cooling system to keep the cab warm.

An additional electric water pump pumps the cooling water through


the heating system when the engine is off. The cab fan pumps air
into the cab. The supplemental heater switches off automatically
when the temperature in the cab is 6 °C below the set value on the
air conditioning. The supplemental heater is activated with Switch
supplemental heater when the ignition is on.

3 2

004909

1. Switch supplemental heater (S199-1)


2. Control unit, cab KCU (D790-1)
3. Circulation pump supplemental heater (M667)

9.4.1 Fresh air filter

Fresh air filter, changing


The fresh air filter is located at the front of the cab.
1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.
2 Remove the cover and change the fresh air filter.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Condenser 9:27

9.4.8 Condenser

Condenser, cleaning

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Blow clean the condenser's cooler with compressed air.

014732

1. Condenser

9.4.9 Moisture filter

Moisture filter, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Start the engine and let it idle.


3 Check the colour of the indicator on the moisture filter.
Blue indication = moisture filter ok.
Grey or pink indication = change moisture filter (see Moisture filter,
changing, page 9:28).
009183

Indicator moisture filter

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:28 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Moisture filter

Moisture filter, changing

WARNING
Personal injury, environmental damage.
Read the safety instructions for refrigerant, see section
B Safety.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Drain the air conditioning of refrigerant R134a, with the intended


draining equipment.

IMPORTANT
Working on the air conditioning requires special
authorisation.

3 Disconnect hoses and cabling from the moisture filter.


4 Disconnect the moisture filter pressure switch from the moisture
009183

filter.
5 Change the moisture filter.
6 Fit the pressure switch and connect the hoses to the moisture filter.
7 Leak test and refill the machine with refrigerant R134a, using the
intended equipment.
For volume, see section F Technical data.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Wiper/washer system 9:29

9.5 Wiper/washer system


Wiper/washer system, description
On the cab there are wipers for the front windshield, rear window,
and roof window. The function is to clean the windows and maintain
B good visibility from the cab.

The wiper arm is attached to the wiper motor's shaft over a splined
taper. The shaft is made of hardened steel and the wiper arm's
E C bracket is made of a mild die cast material.

When installing it is important to make sure that the splines are free
D from metal burrs or similar. Also, the nuts shall be tightened so tight
that the splines are pressed into the bracket and work like drive
flanges. Counterhold the wiper arm when installing so that the torque
is not transmitted to the motor as it may be damaged (16–20 Nm

002214
A tightening torque).

A Wiper motor front The wipers turn off automatically 2 minutes after the operator has left
the cab. The wipers are activated automatically when the operator sits
B Wiper motor roof in the set, selects a gear, or if the accelerator pedal is pressed down.
C Wiper motor rear
D Washer motor and reservoir
E Wiper, front

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:30 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Lighting system

9.6 Lighting system


Lighting system, function description
The function of the lighting is to increase safety during operation and
load handling.

The lights are turned off automatically after 5 minutes of idling so that
the lights do not drain the batteries. Extra work lights are turned off after
2 minutes. The lighting is activated automatically when the operator
sits in the set, selects a gear, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed.

NOTE
It is important to use the correct bulb type for each area. See section
F Technical data.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Lighting system 9:31

1 2 3 5 4

9
10
13 11
6
D6 17
14 14
18
7 15
16 M
D790-1 D790-2
20 8 29 12 31
D797-1 D797-2 D791
19
Pa

009766
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 32 33
1. Switch work lights cab roof (S105-1) 21. Direction indicator (H422, H423, H426 & H427)
2. Switch work lighting attachment (S105-2) 22. Running lights (H416-1, H416-2, H417-1 & H417-2)
3. Switch working lights mast (S105-3) 23. Driving lights low beams (E400L & E400R)
4. Switch headlights (S100) 24. Driving lights high beams (E402L-1 & E402R-1)
5. Switch rotating beacon (S110) 25. Tail lights (H412L & H412R)
6. Break-contact door (S266-LE & S266-RI) 26. Brake lights (H411L & H411R)
7. Switch step lighting (S141)
27. Working lights mast (E404L-1 & E404R-1)
8. Control unit cab (D790-1)
28. Extra work lights mast (E404L-4 & E404R-4)
9. Multi-function lever (S162)
Extra work lights front fender (E404L-4 &
10. Lever direction indicator (S161) E404R-4)
11. Switch interior lighting on Control unit KIT (D790-2)
29. Control unit frame option (D797-2)
12. Control unit KIT (D790-2)
30. Extra work lights mast (E404L-2 & E404R-2)
13. Relay work lights cab roof (K3017-1 and K3017-2)
Extra work lights front fender (E404L-2 &
14. Work lights cab roof (E406L-1 E406R-1, E406L-2 E404R-2)
and E406R-2)
31. Control unit attachment (D791)
15. Back-up lights (E405L & E405R)
16. Rotating beacon (H428) 32. Work lights Twistlock attachment (E404L-3 &
E404R-3)
17. Interior lights (E434-1)
Work lights Lifting hook attachment with lock lug
18. Step lighting (E433) (E404UL, E404UR, E404LL and E404LR)
19. Make-contact brake lights (S216) 33. Extra work lights Twistlock attachment (E404L-5
20. Control unit frame (D797-1) & E404R-5)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:32 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Lighting system

Lighting system, component location


The function of the lighting is to increase safety during operation and
load handling.

NOTE
It is important to use the correct bulb type for each area. See section
F Technical data.

The following lighting is available:

1 4 5 6 6 7 9

30 3,8,10

12

29

28

27

26

008397
22,23,24,25 21 19,20 18 17 16 15 11,13,14
1. Working lights mast (E404L-1 & E404R-1) 17. Switches, see Controls and instruments, overview,
page 9:4
2. Extra work lights mast (E404L-4 & E404R-4)
18. Switch step lighting (S141)
3. Relay working lights cab roof (K3017-1 & K3017-2)
19. Control unit frame option (D797-2)
4. Multi-function lever (S162) 20. Control unit frame (D797-1)
5. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 21. Make-contact brake lights (S216)
6. Interior lights (E434-1) 22. Direction indicators front (H422 & H423)
7. Work lights cab roof (E406L-1 & E406R-1) 23. Running lights front (H416-1 & H417-1)
8. Extra work lights cab roof (E406L-2 & E406R-2) 24. Driving lights low beams (E400L & E400R)
9. Rotating beacon (H428) Driving lights high beams (E402L-1 & E402R-1)
10. Control unit cab (D790-1) 25. Extra work lights front fender (E404L-4 & E404R-4)
11. Running lights rear (H416-2 & H417-2)
26. Work lights lifting hook attachment (E404LL &
12. Back-up lights (E405L & E405R), white
E404LR)
13. Tail lights (H412L & H412R) red
27. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
Brake lights (H411L & H411R)
28. Work lights twistlock attachment (E404L & E404R)
14. Direction indicators rear (H426 & H427)
29. Extra work lights carriage (E404L & E404R)
15. Break-contact door (S266-LE & S266-RI)
30. Work lights lifting hook attachment (E404UL &
16. Step lighting (E433) E404UR)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Signalling system 9:33

9.7 Signalling system


Signal system, function description
The function of the signals is to increase safety during operation and
load handling. This can take place with light and sound. The machine
has the following signal systems:

NOTE
It is important to use the correct bulb type for each area. See section
F Technical data.

1 2 3 4

17 6
7
15
16
D6

13 18
14 M
8 19
D790-1 5 D790-2 D795
9
D797-1 D791-1
20
10 11 21

009767
12

1. Switch rotating beacon (S110) 15. Relay loud horn (K3016)


2. Switch hazard lights (Hazard) (S109) 16. Loud horn (H850-1)
3. Switch parking brake (S107) 17. Make-contact operator in seat (S230)
4. Switch horn (S149-3) 18. Buzzer cab (H853)
5. Control unit cab (D790-1) 19. Control unit KID (D795)
6. Multi-function lever (S162) 20. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
7. Lever direction indicator (S161) 21. Buzzer automatic spreading (H9003)
8. Control unit KIT (D790-2)
9. Control unit frame (D797-1) NOTE
10. Direction indicator (H422, H423, H426 & H427) On machines with side lift attachment, the sound
signal can also be activated with button open
11. Back-up lights (E405L & E405R) twistlock (S1002) on the hydraulic functions panel
12. Back-up alarm (H965) or open twistlock on the joystick, providing that the
function for open twistlocks at contact is not active.
13. Horn (H850)
14. Rotating beacon (H428)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:34 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Signalling system

Signalling system, component location


The following communication systems are available.

1 2 3 4 5 6

008395
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 10,11 9 8 7
1. Control unit KID (D795) 11. Control unit cab (D790-1)
2. Buzzer cab (H853) 12. Make-contact operator in seat (S230)
3. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 13. Horn (H850)
4. Multi-function lever (S162) 14. Switches, see Controls and instruments, overview,
5. Lever direction indicator (S161) page 9:4
6. Rotating beacon (H428) 15. Loud horn (H850-1)
7. Back-up alarm (H965) 16. Control unit frame (D797-1)
8. Back-up lights (E405L & E405R) 17. Direction indicators front (H422 & H423)
9. Direction indicators rear (H426 & H427) 18. Control unit attachment (D791-1)
10. Relay loud horn (K3016) 19. Buzzer automatic spreading (H9003)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Entertainment and communication 9:35

9.8 Entertainment and


communication
Entertainment and communication, general

For information and description of equipment, see supplier's


documentation for each product.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:36 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Glass/windows/mirrors

9.9 Glass/windows/mirrors
Glass/windows/mirrors, component location
The function of the window panes is to enclose the cab and to give
C the operator good visibility. Tempered glass windows are standard on
all trucks. Roof windows are a safety feature and are therefore always
D made of polycarbonate plastic.

The rear-view mirrors are of the type convex mirror. There is an


interior rear view mirror on all machines.

Tinted tempered glass windows are available as an option.

The following panes may be of laminated glass:


• Side windows front, position E
A E B 001512 • Windshield (front window), position B

A Side windows As an option the machine can be equipped with a back-up


(reversing) camera and a screen in the cab to improve visibility to
B Windscreen (front window)
the rear. The back-up camera is located on the counterweight. The
C Roof window monitor is installed on an adjustable stand on the left door pillar.
D Rear window
E Side windows, front

9.9.3 Roof window


Roof window, description
Roof windows are a safety feature and are therefore always made
of polycarbonate plastic.

Roof window, checking


Check that the roof window is not damaged or cracked. If the roof
window is defective, change it immediately.

WARNING
The strength of the roof window can be substantially
reduced by exposure to substances that contain
aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, or chlorinated
hydrocarbons.
Low strength! Danger!
Check the outside surface of the roof window at regular
intervals. Clean only with windscreen washer fluid or
a mild cleaning agent. Rinse thoroughly with plenty
of lukewarm water. Replace a damaged roof window
immediately if it is cracked or scratched!

9.9.5 Rearview mirror


Rearview mirror, description
The rear-view mirrors are of the type convex mirror. There is an interior
rear view mirror on all machines.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Cab structure and suspension 9:37

9.10 Cab structure and suspension


Design and suspension, description
The cab has a flat floor with a bracket for the operator's seat. It is
suspended in the cab substructure via heavy-duty rubber insulators
located on the cab's underside. This is to minimise vibrations from
1 the frame to the cab. There is an insulator at four points, one in each
corner. Each insulator bracket has a rubber bushing and a bolt.

003206
4
1. Cab frame
2. Door
3. Cab suspension
4. Cab undercarriage

9.10.2 Doors
Doors, description
The cab has two doors, the left is the driver's door and the right is the
emergency exit. The doors have:
• hand rail
• handle
• keylock
• opening window (emergency exit door )

There are switches in the doors that detect whether the door is open.
The switch is used to illuminate the interior lighting and indicate an
open door.

The signal can be controlled with the diagnostics menu, see section
8 Control system, group 8.4.2.9 LIGHTS, menu 9 or 8.4.11.5
MOVE-CAB, menu 1.

Doors, checking
1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Visually inspect the door's mounting points.


Lubricate the hinges of the doors if necessary.
3 Check the door's locking mechanism with regard to function and
wear.
006914

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:38 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Cab undercarriage

9.10.3 Cab undercarriage

Cab undercarriage, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.


2 Check that the welding seams at the cab's mounting points are
intact and free of visible cracks.
3 Check that the isolators are intact. Replace any damaged isolator.
4 Check that bolted joints are tightened and that the brackets are
undamaged. Attend to as needed.

008393

The cab's mounting points with dampers.

9.10.4 Cab tilt


Cab tilt, function description

WARNING
Presence under tilted cab.
Fatal danger!
Ensure that no one is present under or near a tilted cab.
Visibility is impaired!

NOTE
Only manoeuvre the cab while stationary!

Cab tilt simplifies aiming during load handling.

The cab is tilted up to obtain a more ergonomic working position. The


switch for Automatic/Manual cab tilt is used to select automatic or
manual cab tilt.

For automatic cab tilt, the cab is tilted automatically when the
attachment is at a preset lifting height. For manual cab tilt, the cab
is tilted with the switch for Manual tilt. In order for the cab to be
tilted automatically, the machine's speed may not exceed 5 km/h, the
operator doors must be closed and the parking brake disengaged.

If the cab is not in the lowest position, i.e. tilted, the machine's speed is
limited to a maximum of 5 km/h.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Cab tilt 9:39

5
2 1 3 1
0
0 2

4 6
D790-1 D797-1
7

D797-2 12
8

9
12
B

T
A

TP
P LS LSPB
10

11

13
1

009659
1. Hydraulic oil pumps 7. Sensor, cab up (B769-2) / cab down (B769-1)
2. Switch automatic/manual cab tilt (S199-2) 8. Control unit frame option (D797-2)
3. Switch manual cab tilt, cab up/down (S1010) 9. Solenoid valve cab up (Y6047) and cab down (Y6048)
4. Control unit cab (D790-1) 10. Control valve cab tilt
5. Sensor for cab tilt (B7211-1) on mast for automatic 11. Shuttle valve
cab tilt 12. Cab tilt cylinders
6. Control unit frame (D797-1) 13. Return filter

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:40 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Cab tilt

Tilt cassette, checking

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Check:
• tilt cassette's mounting points and joints.
• tilt cylinders and tilt cylinder mounting points.
• function of the crush protection on the sides of the tilt cassette.
3 Attend to as needed.

009658

Tilt cassette

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Cab interior 9:41

9.11 Cab interior


Cab interior, description
The cab is designed for best operator comfort. On the dashboard
panels there are grouped switches, controls, warning and indicator
lights to give the operator a good working environment.

Recycled material is used for all parts.


• Dashboard panels
• Interior plastic parts
• Interior textile/fabric parts
• Insulation

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:42 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Frame

9.12 Frame
Frame, description
The function of the frame is to be the structural support for the
machine's components:

2 1

014666
3 4 5 6
1. The rear section of the frame with counterweights
2. Engine compartment with engine and transmission mounts
3. The rear section of the frame with drive axle mounts
4. Bracket front fenders
5. Cab mounts (4 points)
6. Steering axle mounts

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Body structure 9:43

9.13 Body structure


Body, description
The body's function is a part of the frame. There are fenders to deflect
dirt, footsteps and handrail to facilitate access on the frame, engine
hood to deflect dirt and objects from the engine compartment and a
counterweight to balance the machine's lifting capacity.

2 1

008392
3
1. Counterweight
2. Hood engine compartment
3. Fenders

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:44 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Central lubrication

9.14 Central lubrication


Central lubrication, description

Central lubrication lubricates the machine's lubrication points


automatically during operation according to preset intervals and
replaces the lubrication in preventive maintenance. The machine
has two separate central lubrication systems, one for the machine
and one for the attachment.

The central lubrication is built up of the following components:


• Pump unit, with lubricant reservoir.
• Distribution block, that distributes and portions the grease
between the different lubrication points.
The distribution block lubricates one point at a time. If a point
cannot be lubricated properly, e.g. in the event of a line blockage,
the following points will not be lubricated. The grease is forced
out through the safety valve on the pump unit.
• Lines, between main unit and distribution block as well as
distribution block and grease nipples.
• Grease nipples, at lubrication points.

On the pump unit it is possible to adjust the lubrication interval's


frequency and duration.
Example illustration, components, central lubrication
The central lubrication is supplied with voltage when the parking
1. Pump unit
brake is released.
2. Safety valve
3. Distribution block NOTE
The central lubrication does not grease the propeller shaft's
universal joint or the brake pedal, these must still be greased
during preventive maintenance.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Central lubrication 9:45

Central lubrication, checking

1 Check that no grease has been forced out through the safety
valve (position 2).
If grease is pushed out through the safety valve, this means that
there is a system blockage. Locate the blocked line by feeling the
connections at the distribution block. A blocked hose remains
pressurised and the connection becomes firm.

NOTE
If several distribution blocks are connected in series, a clogged
line will be pressurised all the way to the first distribution block.

2 Turn the start key to position I.


3 Operate the pump manually and check that the indicator pin
moves in and out on the distribution blocks.
To operate the pump, loosen the cover and press in switch manual
operation (position 5).
If the indicator pins do not move even when the pump is running,
troubleshoot the pump unit.

NOTE
The system can be lubricated manually through the grease
nipple on the distribution block.
Overview of central lubrication. Example figure.
1. Lubricant nipple, filling point, lubricating grease 4 Fill grease in the pump unit through the filler nipple, see section
F Technical data.
2. Safety valve
3. Lubricant nipple, manual lubrication of the
system
4. Indicator pin
5. Switch, manual operation

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


9:46 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories – Paint/coatings

9.15 Paint/coatings
Paint and surface finish, description
The machine is finished with an alkyd based single component paint
that is applied by brush or sprayed. For colour code (RAL), see
machine card.

Check the machine often for stone chips, impact damage, and
scratches to the paintwork, repair these immediately to avoid corrosion
on the underlying metal. Only use touch-up paint for minor stone chip
damage and scratches, major damage to paintwork should be repaired
by a paint shop.

NOTE
Before performing touch-ups, the surface area must be carefully
cleaned.

For information on other surface and material colours, contact


Cargotec.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10:1

10 Common hydraulics

Contents 10 Common hydraulics


10 Common hydraulics .........................................................................................10:3
10.2 Safety valves..................................................................................................10:4
10.3 Tanks and accumulators ................................................................................10:5
10.4 Pumps............................................................................................................10:6
10.4.2 Axial piston pump with variable displacement...........................................10:7
10.5 Hoses, pipes and valves ................................................................................10:8
10.6 Temperature control, cleaning and hydraulic oil.............................................10:9
10.6.6 Breather filter hydraulic oil tank ...............................................................10:12
10.6.7 Hydraulic oil filter .....................................................................................10:12
10.6.8 Hydraulic oil.............................................................................................10:13
10.6.9 Fine filter hydraulic oil..............................................................................10:15

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10 Common hydraulics – Common hydraulics 10:3

10 Common hydraulics
Common hydraulics, description
Hydraulic functions that are common to several of the machine's
main functions are found under the function common hydraulics. For
example, the hydraulic oil pumps that supply load handling, steering,
and certain cab functions with hydraulic pressure.

The brake system is completely separate, and is found in section 4


Brakes.

Pressure plate

On the machine there is a pressure plate with the most important


pressure information (stamped in). The pressure plate is located on
the left side of the frame in front of the cab steps.

Pressure levels vary with the equipment and therefore they are unique
to each machine. When checking pressure the pressures must
correspond with the pressure plate.

9 2

8
3
7

6 4

5
009654

1. Feed pressure control valve attachment 6. Max. pressure hydraulic oil pump 1
2. Max. brake pressure 7. Steering pressure
3. Gas pressure brake accumulators 8. Servo pressure lift and extension
4. Hydraulic oil pressure brake accumulators 9. Max. pressure hydraulic oil pump 2
5. Gas pressure servo accumulator

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:4 10 Common hydraulics – Safety valves

10.2 Safety valves


Safety valves, component location
1 NOTE
The valves shall be closed during operation and are opened to
depressurise the machine.

008083

1. Relief valve attachment (figure shows closed


valve).
2. Accumulator drain valve with opening knob and
lock ring.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10 Common hydraulics – Tanks and accumulators 10:5

10.3 Tanks and accumulators


Tanks and accumulators, component location
Tank

1 2 1 3 2 4 5 Tank
1. Cover plate for hydraulic oil filter
2. Filler plug hydraulic oil
3. Sight glass hydraulic oil
4. Breather filter hydraulic oil tank
5. Drain plugs hydraulic oil

008086

Accumulator
Accumulator
1 1. Accumulator
008087

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:6 10 Common hydraulics – Pumps

10.4 Pumps
Pumps, general
The machine's hydraulics are supplied from four pumps. Three of
1 them for working hydraulics/steering, and one for the brake system.
The pumps are assembled into two pump banks mounted on the
gearbox power take-off.

Hydraulic oil pump and quick-lift pump (position 1) supply the control
valve for lifting/lowering and tilt, as well as the attachment's control
valves. The quick-lift pump is engaged for lifting without load in order
to increase the lift speed.

The fixed brake oil pump (position 2) feeds the brake system's brake
2 and cooling circuit over an accumulator charging valve, see section 4
Brakes.
3
The main pump (position 3) supplies the steering as well as the
008082

control valve for load handling. The priority valve ensures that there is
always pressure for steering, the residual flow goes to control valve
1. Hydraulic oil pump and quick-lift pump for load load handling.
handling
2. Hydraulic oil pump for brake system, cooling
and filtering
3. Main pump for steering and load handling

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10 Common hydraulics – Axial piston pump with variable displacement 10:7

10.4.2 Axial piston pump with variable


displacement
Axial piston pump with variable displacement,
function description

18
D790-1 D790-2

LS

D797-1 D795 P

8 P

LS

C P
17
6 19
7 P
T
PS TP

5 1

P LS LSPB

EF PP
10 12 P
CF P

14 9 4 T LS
LS

11 T L R
20
2
16

C C

008091
13 15 3
1. Control valve lifting/lowering and tilt 11. Shuttle valve
2. Shuttle valve 12. Shuttle valve
3. Main pump 13. Quick-lift pump
4. Priority valve 14. Solenoid valve activation quick-lift pump (Y6062)
5. Pressure reducer 15. Hydraulic oil pump
6. Accumulator servo pressure 16. Pressure limiting valve
7. Servo filter 17. Control valve attachment
8. Control unit frame (D797-1) 18. Control valve cab tilt
9. Solenoid valve activation main pump (Y6062-2) 19. Control valve joystick control
10. Shuttle valve 20. Steering valve

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:8 10 Common hydraulics – Hoses, pipes and valves

10.5 Hoses, pipes and valves


Hoses, pipes and valves, component location

1 2

7
3
6
5
4

008088
1. Collecting block unfiltered returns 5. Shuttle valve
2. Priority valve 6. Solenoid valve activation main pump (Y6062-2)
3. Accumulator charging valve 7. Solenoid valve activation quick-lift pump (Y6062)
4. Shuttle valve

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10 Common hydraulics – Temperature control, cleaning and hydraulic oil 10:9

10.6 Temperature control, cleaning


and hydraulic oil
Temperature control, cleaning and hydraulic oil,
function description
The hydraulic system's oil is cooled and cleaned by means
of it circulating through a cooler and filters. The cooler has a
temperature-controlled electric fan that counteracts overheating.

Temperature control consists of hydraulic oil tank, hydraulic oil pump,


hydraulic oil cooler, cooling fan, hydraulic oil filter, fine filter, hydraulic
oil temperature sensor and bypass valve.

The hydraulic oil pump for the brake system pumps oil (from the tank)
through the brake system's cooling circuit to be cooled in the hydraulic
oil cooler. Some of the oil is filtered by the fine filter. An electric cooling
fan increases the air flow through the cooler when the temperature
needs to be reduced. When the oil is cold, a bypass valve opens
and leads the oil directly to the tank so that resistance through the
cooler and filter does not become too great. The bypass valve closes
when the oil gets hot and then instead leads the oil through the cooler
and filter. The temperature sensor controls activation of the fan and
temperature display in the display.

Return oil from load handling and steering is filtered through the
hydraulic oil filter in the hydraulic oil tank.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:10 10 Common hydraulics – Temperature control, cleaning and hydraulic oil

˚C
˚C
P

P
T

D D
EF PP
12 9
P D790-2
P CF D795
LS
T LS
T D797-1
L R
8
16
D D
10 M
P T
6

2 3 4 11
1 1 1 1
5

009638
˚C 7

1. Hydraulic oil pumps 7. Sensor hydraulic oil temperature (B776)


2. Brake oil filter 8. Control unit frame (D797-1)
3. Accumulator charging valve 9. Control unit KID (D795)
4. Drive axle block 10. Cooling fan
5. Fine filter 11. Thermal bypass valve
6. Hydraulic oil cooler 12. Control unit KIT (D790-2)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10 Common hydraulics – Temperature control, cleaning and hydraulic oil 10:11

Temperature control, cleaning and hydraulic oil,


component location

1 2

10

8
5

008085
1. Breather filter hydraulic oil tank 6. Bypass valve
2. Hydraulic oil filter 7. Sensor hydraulic oil temperature (B776)
3. Fine filter, hydraulic oil 8. Tank heater
4. Cooling fan 9. Hydraulic oil pumps
5. Cooler hydraulic oil 10. Hydraulic oil tank

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:12 10 Common hydraulics – Breather filter hydraulic oil tank

10.6.6 Breather filter hydraulic oil tank

Breather filter hydraulic oil tank, changing

1 Turn off the engine and turn off the main electric power.

2 Clean the area around the filter housing.


1 2 1 3 2 4
3 Remove the filter housing.
Press down and turn approx. 1/8 turn clockwise.
4 Replace the filter insert.
Handle the filter insert as environmentally hazardous waste.
5 Fit the filter housing.
Press down and turn approx. 1/8 turn anticlockwise.
008084
6 Reset the filter indicator by pressing down the button in the middle
on the glass centred on the filter insert.
1. Cover plate for hydraulic oil filter
2. Filling point hydraulic oil
3. Sight glass hydraulic oil
4. Breather filter hydraulic oil tank

10.6.7 Hydraulic oil filter

Hydraulic oil filter, changing

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

IMPORTANT
Ensure cleanliness around the filter and filling point
when working on the hydraulic tank.
Dirt particles may cause machine damage.

1 Turn off the engine and turn off the main electric power.

2 Remove the cover plates (position 1) over the hydraulic oil filters.
3 Lift up the filter unit and place it in the receptacle. Let the hydraulic
oil drain.
4 Part the filter unit and remove the filter insert. Handle the filter
insert as environmentally hazardous waste. Note position of the
parts.

1. Cover plate for oil filter


2. Filling point hydraulic oil
3. Sight glass hydraulic oil
4. Filling point hydraulic oil
5. Breather filter hydraulic oil tank

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10 Common hydraulics – Hydraulic oil 10:13

5 Clean the filter holder's parts. Be especially thorough with the


magnetic rod.
6 Fit the new filters and assemble the filter units.
7 Install the filter units and cover plates. Tighten the bolts crosswise.
8 Check the oil level, see Hydraulic oil, level check, page 10:13.

Magnetic rod

10.6.8 Hydraulic oil


Hydraulic oil, level check

NOTE
The oil level is checked with the mast lowered and the attachment in
the 20-foot position.

1 Machine in service position, section B Safety.

2 Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank. The oil level should be
visible in the sight glass. Fill oil as required. For oil grade, see
section F Technical data.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:14 10 Common hydraulics – Hydraulic oil

Hydraulic oil, changing

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

IMPORTANT
Ensure cleanliness around the filter and filling point
when working on the hydraulic tank.
Dirt particles may cause machine damage.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Remove the filler cap and pump out the hydraulic oil in a collection
container.
3 When most possible oil has been pumped out. Place a container
under the hydraulic oil tank's drain plug and drain the last hydraulic
oil.
4 Fit the drain plug when the oil has drained.

NOTE
Make sure that the drain plug's washer seal is also removed.
1. Cover plate for oil filter
5 If the hydraulic oil filters are to be changed, change them before
2. Filling point hydraulic oil filling the tank with oil, see Hydraulic oil filter, changing, page
3. Sight glass hydraulic oil 10:12.

4. Filling point hydraulic oil


5. Breather filter hydraulic oil tank

6 Fill new hydraulic oil in the filler holes on the filter's cover
plates. This filters the oil and protects the hydraulic system from
contamination.
Fill oil until the oil level is in the middle of the sight glass. For
volume and quality, see section F F Technical data.

CAUTION
Do not overfill!
Leakage and environmental damage!
The hydraulic oil level is checked when all hydraulic
cylinders are in the retracted position.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


10 Common hydraulics – Fine filter hydraulic oil 10:15

10.6.9 Fine filter hydraulic oil

Fine filter hydraulic oil, changing

NOTE
Read safety instructions for oil before starting work, see section B
Safety.

IMPORTANT
Ensure cleanliness around the filter and filling point
when working on the hydraulic tank.
Dirt particles may cause machine damage.

1 Machine in service position, see section B Safety.

2 Remove the cover.


3 Take out a drainage receptacle.
4 Lift up the filter cartridge and place it in the receptacle. Let the
hydraulic oil drain.
5 Install the new filter cartridge and put the cover on the fine filter.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


10:16

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11:1

11 Common electrics

Contents 11 Common electrics


11 Common electrics ............................................................................................11:3
11.2 Electrical protection........................................................................................ 11:4
11.2.2 Fuses ........................................................................................................ 11:5
11.3 Batteries......................................................................................................... 11:9
11.3.1 Start battery............................................................................................... 11:9
11.4 Alternator ..................................................................................................... 11:11
11.5 Distribution of electricity ............................................................................... 11:12
11.5.1 Voltage feed ............................................................................................ 11:12
11.5.2 Electronic box.......................................................................................... 11:18
11.5.3 Control units ............................................................................................ 11:19
11.6 Communication ............................................................................................ 11:21
11.6.1 CAN bus .................................................................................................. 11:21
11.6.2 Redundant CAN-bus ............................................................................... 11:21
11.6.3 CAN-bus drivetrain .................................................................................. 11:21
11.6.5 RMI (Remote Machine Interface) ............................................................ 11:22

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Common electrics 11:3

11 Common electrics
Common electrics, general
Electrical functions that are common to several of the machine's main
functions are found under the function common electrics. For example,
voltage feed and CAN-bus.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:4 11 Common electrics – Electrical protection

11.2 Electrical protection


Electrical protection, component location
1. Control breaker
2. Circuit fuses, electronic box cab
3. Main fuses, electrical distribution box frame
4. Circuit fuses, electrical distribution box frame
1 2 5. Battery disconnector

3
4
F5

93
D7
F5
F5

8
8-1

6
X1
F5

8-2

K1
8-3

K3 K4
K2
009173

5
4

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Fuses 11:5

11.2.2 Fuses
Fuses, description

IMPORTANT
Risk of cable damage and fire in cable harnesses!
Always use fuses with the correct ampere rating.

The electrical system has three main circuits (30-, 15-, and
15E-voltage), see Distribution of electricity, description, page 11:12.
The main circuits are fused several times with main fuses and circuit
fuses.
Main fuses
Main fuses
1
2 The main fuses divide the machine's voltage feed into smaller parts
to maintain as many functions as possible in case of damage to
3 cables harnesses.
4 By the cab's and frame's electrical distribution boxes there are fuse
plates that describe the different fuses.
009167

Main fuses
1. Electric power feed relay K315-1, electric power
to ignition voltage (15), (50 A)
2. Battery voltage (30) to cab, engine, and
transmission, (50 A)
3. Electric power feed relay K3009-1, power to
emergency stop switch voltage (15E), (50 A)
4. Ignition voltage (15) to control units on frame,
engine, cab and transmission, (50 A)

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:6 11 Common electrics – Fuses

Circuit fuses
Circuit fuses

Circuit fuses are grouped in fuse holders that are located in the
electrical distribution box on the frame and the electrical distribution
box in the cab.

By the fuse holders there are fuse plates with information about fused
function and fuse rating.

C
009169

D
E
A Circuit fuses in cab F58-4, 15-fuses (ignition
voltage) and 30-fuses (battery voltage).
B Circuit fuses in cab F58-5, 15-fuses (ignition
voltage).
C 30-fuses F58-1, (battery voltage)
D 15-fuses F58-2, (ignition voltage)
E 15E-fuses F58-3, (control switch voltage)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Fuses 11:7

SUPPLY POWER
A1 10A KCU (KALMAR CAB UNIT)
X2044980 1
B2 5A KCU,START UP (KALMAR CAB UNIT)

F58-4 15
C3 10A SERVICE

CAB
D4 10A OPT CUSTOMER

E5 10A OPT RADIO

MAIN POWER
F6 25A OPT SEAT HEATER, TURNABLE SEAT

F58-4 30
G7 15A OPT WORK LIGHT

CAB
H8 15A OPT AIRCUSHIONED SEAT

A1 25A KCU (KALMAR CAB UNIT)

F58-5 15 SUPPLY POWER CAB


B2 10A KIT (KALMAR INFORMATION TERMINAL)

C3 15A ECC, FAN (ELECTRONIC CLIMATE CONTROL)

D4 5A ECC, RECIRC (ELECTRONIC CLIMATE CONTROL)

E5 10A SERVICE

F6 5A OPT MAP READING LIGHT

G7 10A OPT CONVERTER 12V

014092
H8 10A OPT COMPRESSOR HORN

Circuit fuses electrical distribution box cab

014278

Circuit fuses electrical distribution box frame

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:8 11 Common electrics – Fuses

Fuses, changing

IMPORTANT
Risk of cable damage and fire in cable harnesses!
Always use fuses with the correct ampere rating.

1 Turn off the system voltage (battery disconnector).

2 Remove the cover from the fuse holder.

3 Check that the fuses are intact. Change when needed.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Batteries 11:9

11.3 Batteries
11.3.1 Start battery

Start battery, checking

WARNING
Battery electrolyte contains corrosive sulphuric acid.
Risk of corrosive injuries! Hazardous to health!
Use protective safety goggles and protective work
gloves when working with batteries. Remove
immediately any electrolyte on the skin. Wash with
soap and plenty of water. If electrolyte has splashed in
the eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and
contact a doctor immediately.

1 Check the battery voltage from the operating menu for electrical
system.
With the engine off, the battery voltage should be 23–25 V.
With engine at max. engine speed (2,000 rpm), the battery voltage
should be 27–29 V.
000354

2 Turn off the engine and turn off the system voltage.
Operating menu for electrical system 3 Check that the batteries are clean on the top to prevent leakage
currents between cells, which can cause reduced battery capacity.
Wipe clean with a cloth and clean warm water without detergent.
4 Check that the battery's terminals are free from dirt. If needed,
lube the battery terminals with terminal grease.
5 Check the fluid level in the battery cells. Top up with battery water
if needed.
The electrolyte level should be 10 mm above the cells.

NOTE
Use only distilled water if topping up is necessary.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:10 11 Common electrics – Start battery

Battery cables, checking

DANGER
Check that the battery cables are correctly clamped
and free from damage.
Fire hazard! Risk of personal injury!
Repair or replace damaged clamps and check that no
machine parts wear or chafe against the battery cables.
Change damaged battery cables.

The following battery cables should be checked for clamping, risk of


rubbing and damage to the battery cables. Rectify incorrect clamping
and risks of rubbing. Change battery cables that show signs of damage.
Diesel-powered machines
• Plus-cable between battery and battery disconnector.
• Plus-cable between battery disconnector and starter motor.
• Plus-cable between starter motor and alternator.
• Plus-cable between battery disconnector and main fuses.
• Plus-cable between starter motor and preheating relay.
• Plus-cable between preheating relay and preheating coil.
• Ground cable between battery and frame.
• Ground cable between engine and frame.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Alternator 11:11

11.4 Alternator
Alternator, component location
The alternator is fitted on the engine. Location is dependent on
engine alternative.

014036

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:12 11 Common electrics – Distribution of electricity

11.5 Distribution of electricity


Distribution of electricity, description
This section describes distribution of electric power and communication
between control units. Electric power distribution describes the
foundation of the electrical system and the network of control units.

11.5.1 Voltage feed


Start-up of electrical system, description
When the machine is not used, the machine's electrical system is in
a powerless mode, that is, neither power electronics nor control units
are supplied with voltage. At machine start, voltage feed is activated
and the redundant CAN-bus is initiated. Start is handled by control
unit cab (D790-1).

The first pre-requisite for the machine to be able to perform any action
is to first establish the redundant voltage feed for control units and
then establish CAN-bus communication to administer control signals
for functions.

Control units establish communication when:


• Operator’s door is opened
• Interior lighting is lit
• Flashing hazard lights are activated
• Step lighting is activated
• Start key in position I
Start-up
Start-up
D791

The following takes place at start-up:


Startup signal
1. Start-up signal to Control unit cab (D790-1).

D790-1 D790-2 D795


004755

D797-2 D797-1
(+)

Start-up signal is sent


2. Control unit cab (D790-1) initiates connection of redundant
D791 voltage feed. See Redundant voltage feed of control units,
description, page 11:14.
3. Control unit cab (D790-1) activates ignition voltage (15).
See Ignition voltage (15), description, page 11:15.
D790-1 D790-2 D795
4. Control unit cab (D790-1) establishes redundant CAN-bus.
See Redundant CAN-bus, description, page 11:21.
5. Control unit cab (D790-1) activates CAN-bus drivetrain. See
CAN-bus drivetrain, description, page 11:21.
004756

D797-2 D797-1
(+) 6. Control unit cab (D790-1) activates emergency stop switch
Redundant CAN-bus communication voltage (15E). See Emergency stop switch voltage (15E),
description, page 11:16.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Voltage feed 11:13

System down in powerless mode


The system goes down in powerless mode when:
• Start key in position 0 and no activity signal has been sent.
• Start key in position 0 and the hold circuit's run time for
supplemental heating has run out.
• Start key in position 1 and automatic engine shut-down has been
activated.

The following takes place when the system goes down in powerless
mode.
1. Cab control unit (D790-1) cuts off emergency stop switch voltage
(15E).
See Emergency stop switch voltage (15E), description, page 11:16.
2. Control unit cab (D790-1) cuts off ignition voltage (15).
See Ignition voltage (15), description, page 11:15.
3. Redundant voltage feed to control units is cut off.
4. Cab control unit (D790-1) disconnects the redundant CAN bus.
See Redundant CAN-bus, description, page 11:21.
5. Cab control unit (D790-1) disconnects the redundant voltage feed.
See Redundant voltage feed of control units, description, page
11:14.
6. Control unit cab (D790-1) awaits start-up signal. Other electronics
are powerless.

11.5.1.1 Battery voltage (30)

Battery voltage (30), description


The battery voltage feeds voltage:
• Control system at start. See Start-up of electrical system,
description, page 11:12.
• Starter motor
• Main relays (15-voltage)
• Control switch relays (15E-voltage)
• Engine
• Transmission

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:14 11 Common electrics – Voltage feed

11.5.1.2 Redundant voltage feed of control units

Redundant voltage feed of control units, description


The redundant voltage feed only feeds the control units' control logic
A
D791 and buses, and is controlled completely by Control unit cab (D790-1).
The control units' outputs remain without power and are supplied with
Startup signal voltage first when ignition voltage is activated.

The redundant voltage feed for each control unit is independent of


D790-1 D790-2 D795 other control units. If a control unit is not working the voltage feed to
other control units is not affected.

When all control units have redundant voltage feed and bus
communication, the system is ready to receive, process signals.
D797-2 D797-1
(+) When redundant voltage feed is activated the following takes place.
1. Start-up signal is sent to Control unit cab (D790-1), see A in
B illustration.
D791
2. A hold circuit is activated in Control unit cab (D790-1) which
activates the control unit's control logic.
3. Control unit cab (D790-1) activates redundant voltage feed to the
other control units, see B in illustration.
D790-1 D790-2 D795
Control unit cab (D790-1) has four outputs for voltage feed, other
control units have two inputs for redundant voltage feed. In case
of failure of one feed, the control unit is supplied from the other
feed.
004767

D797-2 D797-1
(+)
A Start-up signal is sent
B All control units are supplied with voltage

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Voltage feed 11:15

11.5.1.3 Ignition voltage (15)

Ignition voltage (15), description


The ignition voltage feeds the power electronics.

The ignition voltage is activated by:


Startup
2 • Start key in position I
• Flashing hazard lights (Hazard) activated
D790-1
When ignition voltage is activated the following takes place.
1
D1 D2 1. Battery disconnector in position 1. Voltage feed to Control unit
D795 cab (D790-1), ignition, switch flashing hazard lights, door switch
and interior lighting.
3
K1
2. Switch for start-up signal gives pulse to Control unit cab (D790-1).
D790-2 CAN bus communication is established (not drivetrain).
- + 4 3. Start key in position I or flashing hazard lights activated.
D797-1 4. Control unit cab (D790-1) feeds voltage to power relay ignition
D3 (K315-1) and relay ignition key lock (K315-2) in electronic box
frame.
D4 D797-2 5. Ignition voltage supplies control units, relays, solenoid valves and
(+) other electronics.
Drivetrain’s CAN bus establishes communication.
D5 D793
K4
004769

D794

Power feed ignition circuit


D1. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 5
D2. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 7
D3. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 10
D4. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 13
D5. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 12

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:16 11 Common electrics – Voltage feed

11.5.1.4 Emergency stop switch voltage (15E)

Emergency stop switch voltage (15E), description


The emergency stop switch voltage supplies functions which require
S250
a control switch, e.g. working hydraulics.
D1
1 The control switch is activated with Switch control switch.
D790-1
Condition for activating emergency stop switch voltage is that Switch,
2 D6 4 control switch, is not pressed in.
D5 D3 D2 • Start key in position I
D797-2 • Ignition voltage (15)
K3009-1 K3009-2 (+) • Switch, control switch not activated.

- + 5 When emergency stop switch voltage is activated the following takes


place.
3 1. Ignition voltage is connected to Control unit cab (D790-1).
D791
D5 D4 2. Control unit cab (D790-1) activates Power relay K3009-1 in
Y6010 electrical distribution box frame and emergency stop switch
K3002 voltage (15E) feeds the circuit until relay K3009-2 in electrical
distribution box frame.
5 3. 15E-feed sends a voltage signal to Control unit cab (D790-1) and
D797-1 Y6011 verifies that Power relay control breaker (K3009-1) is active but
that Power relay control breaker (K3009-2) is inactive.
This verifies that the control breaker is working.
D5
4. Control unit cab (D790-1) activates power relay control breaker
Y6004 (K3009-2) in the electrical distribution box and the emergency
K3007 stop switch voltage supplies voltage to the control units (not
drivetrain).
5 5. When Switch control switch (S250) is pushed down, the
Y6005 emergency stop switch voltage (15E) is cut off to Control unit
cab (D790-1) and power is guided to relay K3002 and K3007, as
009170

well as Power relay control switch K3009-1 and K3009-2. Power


supply to the control units is cut off and the functions cease.
Power feed, control breaker circuit As extra safety the cab control unit (D790-1) also sends status
for Switch, control breaker (S250) on the CAN bus. In this way
D1. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 7
functions are also cut off at signal level.
D2. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 6
D3. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 13
D4. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 15
D5. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 6
D6. Diagnostic menu CAN/POWER 6

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Voltage feed 11:17

11.5.1.5 Voltage converter

Voltage converter, description

The voltage converter is located under a protective casing to the left


behind the driver's seat.

The voltage converter converts 24 Volt to 12 Volt. 12 V voltage


is available for accessories through connector X067 in the cab's
electrical distribution box. (15 and 30 voltage, ground and 12V.)

12 V voltage is also available in sockets on the instrument panel,


see section 9 Frame, body, cab and accessories group 9.1 Controls
and instruments.

CAUTION
Maximum take-off from the voltage converter is 12 V /
20 A (including radio).

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:18 11 Common electrics – Electronic box

11.5.2 Electronic box


Electronic box, component location

5 6
4 7
3
15
2
1 8
16

9 17

10 18

11 19
12

13

14

009171
1. Circuit fuses emergency stop switch voltage (15E) 11. Relay ignition K315-2
F58-3
12. Power relay ignition K315-1
2. Circuit fuses ignition voltage (15) F58-2
13. Power relay control switch K3009-1
3. Circuit fuses battery voltage (30) F58-1
14. Power relay control switch K3009-2
4. Diagnostic socket, engine, VODIA
15. Diagnostic socket machine
5. Diagnostic socket transmission
16. Circuit fuses cab battery voltage (30) and ignition
6. Main fuses voltage (15) F58-4
7. Control unit, transmission (D793) 17. Diagnostic socket CAN-Bus drivetrain
8. Connection block attachment 18. Circuit fuses cab ignition voltage (15) F58-5
9. Relay lift/lower K3007 19. Voltage converter
10. Relay tilt in/out K3002

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Control units 11:19

11.5.3 Control units


Control units, general
Control units are appointed responsibility for parts of functions.
Therefore a certain function cannot be associated to a special control
unit, instead the function occurs in cooperation between control units,
sensors, valves, etc.

Control unit cab and control units on the frame and attachment have
indicator lamps that can be used to check basic information on the
status of other control units.

The indicator lamps have the following significations:


Indicator lamps control unit cab
Table Indicator lamps control unit cab

Light 1 Green light when there is battery voltage to unit. The


light is physically controlled by voltage feed to the
4 control unit.
Light 2 Flashes green when redundant voltage feed control
3 unit and redundant CAN-bus communication is active.
2 No power in system.
006767

1 Green light when power electronics and 15-voltage


are supplied with voltage.
Indicator lamps control unit cab
Light 3 Long yellow single flashing light at communication with
Control unit KID (D795), which is a prerequisite for
trouble-shooting.
Short yellow single flashing light at communication
with Control unit engine (D794) and Control unit
transmission (D793).
Double flashing yellow light (short and long flashes)
at communication with display and engine or
transmission.
Light 4 Red light at active error.
Indicator lamps control units on frame and attachment
Table Indicator lamps control units on frame and attachment
1
2 Light 1 Green light when there is battery voltage to unit. The
light is physically controlled by voltage feed to the
3 control unit.

4 Light 2 Flashes green when any redundant voltage feed left,


redundant voltage feed right or 15-voltage is not found.
006766

Green light when redundant voltage feed, left,


redundant voltage feed, right and 15-voltage are
Indicator lamps control units on frame and attachment. supplied with voltage.
Light 3 Yellow single flashing light at communication with
Control unit KID (D795) or Control unit cab (D790-1).
Yellow double flashing light during communication with
Control unit KID (D795) and Control unit KIT (D790-2).
Light 4 Red light at active error.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:20 11 Common electrics – Control units

Control units, position

1 2 3 4

014738
8 7 6
1. Control unit attachment (D791-1) 5. Control unit, transmission (D793)
2. Control unit KID (D795) 6. Control unit engine (D794)
3. Control unit KIT (D790-2) 7. Control unit, frame (D797-1)
4. Control unit cab (D790-1) 8. Control unit frame option (D797-2)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


11 Common electrics – Communication 11:21

11.6 Communication
Communication, general
1 The machine's communication is handled by a so-called CAN bus
system. The CAN bus system consists of control units connected
together to form a network.
D791
The idea with the network is to share information. Signal values are
sent out by the control unit that, e.g., is connected to a sensor, other
control units can use the signal for their functions.

D790-1 D790-2 D795 The network consists of control units and segments. Segment is the
CAN-bus between control units.

D797-2 1 D797-1
(+)
2 004780
D794 D793

1. Segment
2. CAN-bus drivetrain

11.6.1 CAN bus


CAN-bus, description
The CAN-bus consists of two twisted cables (twisted pair).

11.6.2 Redundant CAN-bus


Redundant CAN-bus, description
Redundant CAN-bus means that each control unit has two
D791 D790-1 D790-2 D795 connections for communication. The CAN-bus is connected in series
CAN R CAN L CAN R CAN L CAN R CAN L
between the control units. This means that the CAN-bus can handle
loss of a segment. If several segments fail, then one or some control
units lose contact with the network and work independently, often with
CAN L CAN R CAN L CAN R limited capacity to perform their task.
004778

D797-2 D797-1
(+) Signals can be checked with diagnostic menu.
Principle illustration redundant CAN-bus

11.6.3 CAN-bus drivetrain


CAN-bus drivetrain, description
Communication with Control unit engine (D794) and Control unit
D790-1 transmission (D793) are separate from the redundant CAN-bus.

Signals can be checked with diagnostic menu.


003171

D794 D793
Principle illustration CAN-bus drivetrain

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


11:22 11 Common electrics – RMI (Remote Machine Interface)

11.6.5 RMI (Remote Machine Interface)


RMI (Remote Machine Interface), description

Remote Machine Interface is a tool for listening to the machine at a


distance. RMI consists of a control unit which is connected to the
machine, antenna for communication and GPS-antenna ( ) for
positioning.

007443
RMI interface (A911) records communication on the CAN bus and
sends the information to a central RMI server. In the event of a fault
RMI-interface (A911) the control unit in the machine can send information via GSM, GPRS,
WLAN, radio modem, SMS or e-mail.

From the RMI server, data from the machine can be analysed and
processed for reading off different values. For example, when it is
time for a service or if there are error codes stored in the machine.

There is a GPS-antenna available as an option, making it


possible to read off the machine's position.

NOTE
RMI only sends data from the machine, but no data can be sent to
the machine. RMI cannot be used to control the machine.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


D:1

D Error codes

D Error codes
Information is found in the Workshop
manual
See Workshop manual DCF 80-100, section D Error codes.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


D:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


E:1

E Diagrams

E Diagrams
Information is found in the Workshop
manual
See Workshop manual DCF 80-100, section E Diagrams.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


E:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F:1

F Technical data

Contents F Technical data


Technical data.................................................................................................... F:3
Data .................................................................................................................F:3
Volumes ...........................................................................................................F:4
Specifications for lifting capacity and dimensions............................................F:6
Oils and lubricants, recommendation...............................................................F:9
Tightening torques, recommendations...........................................................F:11
Tightening torque, connections for air conditioning unit.................................F:12
Tightening torque, ORFS connections ...........................................................F:13
Unit explanations ...........................................................................................F:14
Conversion SI-units........................................................................................F:15
Conversion table, length ................................................................................F:16
Conversion table, area...................................................................................F:16
Conversion table, volume ..............................................................................F:16
Conversion table, weight................................................................................F:16
Conversion table, pressure ............................................................................F:17

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:3

F Technical data
Data
Machine weights and dimensions vary with equipment installed on the
machine and are described in detail in the product specification and
spec. sheet for the relevant machine.

1. Motor Volvo TAD762VE


Power acc. to ISO 3046 (net power) 185 kW between 1600-2200 rpm
Torque ISO 3046 1178 Nm at 1200 rpm
Max. rpm 2200 rpm
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders
Alternator, power 2400 W
System voltage, voltage capacity 24 V (2x12 V / 140 Ah)

2. Transmission Dana-Spicer Off Highway TE17


No. of gears, forward - reverse 3 – 3

3. Driveline/Axle
Drive axle, type Kessler D81
Kessler D91

4. Brakes
Footbrake system - wheels affected Wet Disc Brake – drive wheel
Parking brake system - wheels affected Spring brake - drive wheel

5. Steering
Steering system Hydraulic servo

6. Wheels
Dimension, front and rear 12.00x24 / 14.00x24
Tyre pressure, also see pressure plate 1.0 MPa
Tyre type, front and rear Air filled. Spare and replacement tyres should be of
brand names approved by Cargotec.

9. Cab Spirit Delta


Equivalent sound pressure level LpAZ 67 dB(A)
in cab according to EN12053 with
measurement uncertainty σR= 2.5 dB.
Measuring value with standard engine.
Whole-body vibration in accordance 0.4 - 0.7 m/s2
with EN13059 with measurement
uncertainty k = 0.3 x measured value.

9.6 Lighting system


Indicator lamps 1.2 W2x4.6d
Interior lighting 10 S8.5
Rear lights 5 BA15s
Brake lights 21 BA15s

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:4 F Technical data – Technical data

9.6 Lighting system


Direction indicators 21 BA15s
Rear lights, brake lights & direction indicators - Replace complete
LED
Running lights 5 W2.1x9.5d
- Replace complete
Running lights LED
Headlights (during high, low beam) 75/70 P43t-38 (H4)
Back-up lights 70 PK22s (H3)
Work light bulb 70 PK22s (H3)
35 D1S Xenon tube. Cartridge and
Work light, Xenon ballast are replaced complete.
- Replace complete
Work lighting LED
Revolving beacon 70 PK22s (H1)

Volumes
Any deviation from this table must be supported with written approval
from Cargotec.

1.2 Engine, fuel system


Fuel tank, volume 450 l
Fuel quality Diesel according to:
EN590,
ASTM D 975 No 1–D,
ASTM D 975 No 2–D.
AdBluetank, volume 20 l
Quality AdBlue, according to ISO standard 22241.
1.7 Engine, cooling system
Coolant volume 35 l
Coolant filling Volvo Penta Coolant VCS, ready-mixed

CAUTION
Different types of coolant must not be mixed.
Risk of engine damage and damage to the cooling system if
different types of coolant are mixed.
When changing and topping up coolant, only use coolant of
the same type that was used before.

1.8 Engine, lubrication system


Oil type, quality See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page F:9.
Oil volume incl. filter 27 l

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:5

2.6 Transmission, lubrication TE17


system
Oil type See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page F:9.
Oil volume 37 l

3.3 Driveline/Axle, drive axle Kessler D81 - Kessler D91


Oil grade See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page F:9.
Oil volume, differential 42 l - 54 l
Oil volume, hub reduction 2x4 l - 2x4 l

4.8 Brake system


Oil grade See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page F:9.

7 Load handling
Oil grade See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page F:9.

9 Frame, body, cab and accessories


Refrigerant air conditioning R134a
Volume refrigerant Se sign for air conditioning
Lubricant air conditioning ZEXEL PAG-oil ZXL100
Windshield wiper fluid, volume 5 l

10 Common hydraulics
Oil grade See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page F:9.
Hydraulic oil tank, volume 360 l
Hydraulic oil system, volume 450 l

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:6 F Technical data – Technical data

Specifications for lifting capacity and


dimensions

β α

A2

100 100

H4

H5

B S

H3

R1
R2

H6
H8
H10

100

014020
100
L3 L2 A1
L

DCF80-45 DCF90-45 DCF100-45


E5 E6 E7 E8 E5 E6 E7 E8 E5 E6 E7 E8
Lifting capacity
Classification [kg x 8 9 10
103]
Centre of gravity 1220 1220 1220
distance (L4 [mm])
Number of 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5+1 6+1 7+1 8+1
containers, 8'6"
container
Number of 5 5 6 7 5 5 6 7 5+1 5+1 6+1 7+1
containers, 9'6"
container
Dimensions
Truck length (L 6900 6900 6970
[mm])
Truck width (B 4050 4100 4600
[mm])
Height, base 3940 4000 4000
machine, Spirit
Delta (H6 [mm])

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:7

DCF80-45 DCF90-45 DCF100-45


Seat height (H8 2800 2860 2860
[mm])
Distance drive axle 1170 1170 1240
- the attachment's
front section (L2
[mm])
Axle distance (L3 4550 4550 4550
[mm])
Track (front - rear) 3270 – 2250 3270 – 2200 3750 – 2200
(T [mm])
Minimum turning 6750 7000 7000
radius, outer (R1
[mm])
Slewing radius, 1150 1500 1500
inner (R2 [mm])
Ground clearance, 250 300 - 300
min [mm]
Minimum track 10600 10850 10850
width for 90°
stacking, 20'
container (A1
[mm])
Minimum track 14250 14350 14350
width for 90°
stacking, 40'
container (A2
[mm])
Standard Duplex mast
Lift height (H4 1518 16180 18680 21180 15240 16240 18740 21240 15300 16300 18800 21300
[mm]) 0
Mast height, min. 8540 9040 1029 1154 8600 9100 1035 1160 8600 9100 1035 1160
(H3 [mm]) 0 0 0 0 0 0
Mast height, max. 1504 1604 1854 2104 1510 1610 1860 2110 1510 1610 1860 2110
(H5 [mm]) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Mast tilting, 3 – 3 3 – 3 3 – 3
forward – back
(α – ß [mm])
Attachment
Height under 2180 2240 -
twistlock (H10
[mm])
Height under lifting - - 2300
hooks (H10 [mm])
Side shift ± (V1 600 600 600
[mm])
Weight
Kerb weight [kg x 36.5 37.1 38.7 40.4 37.3 38.0 39.6 41.2 40.1 40.8 42.4 44.0
10 3]
Axle load pressure 23.9 24.6 26.2 27.8 24.1 24.8 26.4 28.0 25.6 26.2 27.9 29.5
front, (without
load) [kg]
Axle load pressure 36.1 36.7 38.3 40.0 37.7 38.5 40.1 41.7 40.8 41.6 43.2 44.8
front, (with
classified load)
[kg]

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:8 F Technical data – Technical data

DCF80-45 DCF90-45 DCF100-45


Axle load pressure 12550 13200 14500
rear, (without load)
[kg]
Axle load pressure 8400 8500 9200
rear, (with
classified load)
[kg]

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:9

Oils and lubricants, recommendation


The service intervals specified by Cargotec in the maintenance manual
are conditional on oil selection according to the following table. The
table states recommended viscosity for different oil types and grades
depending on outdoor temperature.

Any deviation from this table must be approved in writing by Cargotec


and may mean changed service intervals.

°C -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40


Oil type, quality °F -40 -22 -4 +14 +32 +50 +68 +86 104
1.8 Engine, lubrication system
VDS-3 SAE 15W40
SAE 5W30 (engine oil)

2.6 Transmission, lubrication system


ATF Dexron III DEXRON III (trademark)

3.3 Driveline/Axle, drive axle


API GL-5 SAE 80W140
SAE 75W90

7 Load handling
Oil planetary gear hydraulic motor, hypoid oil SAE 80W140
API GL-5
SAE 75W90
Disc brake hydraulic motor, See "10 Common
hydraulics" below
10 Common hydraulics
DIN 51524 Part 3 HVLP ISO VG 68
ISO VG 46 HV
ISO VG 32

NOTE
Oil filters shall always be changed in connection with oil change.
The change interval for engine oil is conditional on the sulphur
content in the fuel not exceeding 0.5%.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:10 F Technical data – Technical data

*) The oil in the brake system must fulfil one of the quality requirements.

API = American Petroleum Institute

VDS = Volvo Drain Specification

Grease

Use a universal grease type EP according to NLGI Grade 2 (EP2) for


all lubrication points except for lifting equipment and slide plates.

For lifting equipment, use a universal grease type EP according to


NLGI Grade 2 (EP2) with 3-5% Molybdenum disulfide intermix.

For slide plates, use lubricants approved by Cargotec. Order from


Cargotec Parts department. 0.65 kg cartridge for grease gun, part no.
923110.0360, and 5 kg can, part no. 923595.0003.

NOTE
Select grease grade according to relevant climate.

Electrical connector grease

Use electrical contact grease part no. 923836.0552.

Sealant silicone

Use silicone part no. 923107.0308.

Silicone adhesive

Use silicone adhesive part no. 923854.0100.

Coolant

Only use ready-mixed recommended coolant. Select mixture of the


coolant that is adapted for correct temperature.

CAUTION
Different types of coolant must not be mixed.
Risk of engine damage and damage to the cooling
system if different types of coolant are mixed.
When changing and topping up coolant, only use
coolant of the same type that was used before.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:11

Tightening torques, recommendations


The tightening torques in the following table are recommendations
when tightening bolts and nuts.

When torquing using a machine, for example, bolt runner, the tightening
torque should be reduced by approx. 5%.

For soft materials (lower hardness than 200 HB), use washer under
both bolt head and nut. As an alternative, use flange bolt or flange nut.

Tighten to the prescribed torque without stopping.

Recommended tightening torque varies depending on surface


treatment. Certain combinations of bolts and nuts require lubrication
according to the following table.

State Screw Nut Lubrication


1 untreated untreated oil
2 bright galvanised untreated or bright galvanised dry or oil
3 hot-galvanised untreated dry or oil

Quality 8.8 10.9 12.9


State 1 2 3 1 1

Fine M-thread
M81 27 Nm 24 Nm 30 Nm 39 Nm 46 Nm
M101,25 54 Nm 48 Nm 61 Nm 78 Nm 91 Nm
M121,25 96 Nm 85 Nm 108 Nm 135 Nm 162 Nm
M161,5 230 Nm 205 Nm 260 Nm 323 Nm 388 Nm
M181,5 330 Nm 294 Nm 373 Nm 466 Nm 559 Nm
M-thread
M4 3.2 Nm 2.9 Nm 3.6 Nm 4.6 Nm 5.5 Nm
M5 6.4 Nm 5.7 Nm 7.2 Nm 9.1 Nm 11 Nm
M6 11 Nm 9.8 Nm 12.5 Nm 16 Nm 19 Nm
M8 26 Nm 24 Nm 30 Nm 38 Nm 45 Nm
M10 52 Nm 47 Nm 59 Nm 74 Nm 89 Nm
M12 91 Nm 81 Nm 103 Nm 128 Nm 154 Nm
M16 220 Nm 198 Nm 250 Nm 313 Nm 375 Nm
M20 430 Nm 386 Nm 490 Nm 620 Nm 732 Nm
M24 750 Nm 668 Nm 848 Nm 1050 Nm 1270 Nm
M30 1480 Nm 1317 Nm 1672 Nm 2080 Nm 2500 Nm
UNC-thread
1/4 12.5 Nm 11.1 Nm 14.1 Nm 17.6 Nm 20 Nm
5/16 25 Nm 22.3 Nm 28.3 Nm 35 Nm 42 Nm
3/8 44 Nm 39 Nm 50 Nm 62 Nm 73 Nm
7/16 70 Nm 62 Nm 79 Nm 100 Nm 118 Nm
1/2 107 Nm 95 Nm 121 Nm 151 Nm 178 Nm
9/16 153 Nm 136 Nm 173 Nm 216 Nm 255 Nm
5/8 210 Nm 187 Nm 237 Nm 298 Nm 353 Nm
3/4 370 Nm 390 Nm 418 Nm 524 Nm 619 Nm

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:12 F Technical data – Technical data

Quality 8.8 10.9 12.9


7/8 594 Nm 528 Nm 671 Nm 839 Nm 990 Nm
1 889 Nm 791 Nm 1005 Nm 1260 Nm 1480 Nm
1 1/8 1260 Nm 1120 Nm 1424 Nm 1780 Nm 2100 Nm
1 1/4 1760 Nm 1565 Nm 1990 Nm 2490 Nm 2940 Nm
1 3/8 2320 Nm 2065 Nm 2620 Nm 3280 Nm 3870 Nm
1 1/2 3060 Nm 2720 Nm 3455 Nm 4320 Nm 5100 Nm

Tightening torque, connections for air


conditioning unit
O-ring coupling cooling coils

Hose diameter Thread Tightening torque


mm inch inch Nm
6 1/4" 7/16" 7-13 Nm
10 3/8" 5/8" 14-20 Nm
10 3/8" 11/16" 14-20 Nm
12 1/2" 3/4" 14-26 Nm
16 5/8" 7/8" 27-41 Nm
19 3/4" 1 1/16" 34-46 Nm
Pressure switch 3/8" 7-13 Nm
7/16"

The above values should be considered guidelines and may vary


depending on installation.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:13

Tightening torque, ORFS connections


Pipe and hose coupling

Pipe diameter Tightening torque


mm inch Nm
6 1/4 23-25
8 5/16
33-38
10 3/8
12 1/2 51-57
14 -

15 - 80-90
16 5/8
18 3/4
120-130
20 -

22 7/8
150-170
25 1"
28 -

30 - 180-200
32 1"1/4
35 -
200-240
38 1"1/2

Wrench size Tightening torque


mm inch Nm
17 11/16 23-25
22 13/16 33-38
24 15/16 51-57
36 1 3/8 120-130
41 1 5/8 150-170

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:14 F Technical data – Technical data

Goods coupling

UNF-UN Metric-ISO BSSP


Thread (inch) Tightening torque Thread Tightening torque Thread (inch) Tightening torque (Nm)
(Nm) (mm) (Nm)
7/16-20 21 10x1 20 1/8-28 20
1/2-20 27 12x1.5 35 1/4-19 35
9/16-18 40 14x1.5 45 3/8-19 70
3/4-16 78 16x1.5 55 1/2-14 100
7/8-14 110 18x1.5 68 3/4-14 190
1"1/16-12 180 20x1.5 80 1"-11 300
1"3/16-12 230 22x1.5 98 1"1/4-11 330
1"5/16-12 285 26x1.5 170 1"1/2-11 400
1"5/8-12 320 27x2 180
1"7/8-12 400 33x2 310
42x2 330
48x2 400

Unit explanations
Unit Abbreviation
Newton metre Nm
Kilopond metre kpm
Kilopascal kPa
Megapascal MPa
Kilowatt kW
Kilojoule kJ
British thermal unit Btu
Calorie ca

Inch in
Feet ft
Yard yd
Mile mile
Centimetre cm

Meter m

Kilometre km

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:15

Conversion SI-units
SI-unit Conversion factor Non-SI Conversion factor SI
Torque
Nm x 10.2 = kg cm x 0.8664 = lb in
Nm x 0.74 = lbf ft x 1.36 = Nm
Nm x 0.102 = kg m x 7.22 = lb ft
Pressure (Pa = N/ m2)
kPa x 4.0 = in.H2O x 0.249 = kPa
kPa x 0.30 = in.Hg x 3.38 = kPa
kPa x 0.145 = psi x 6.89 = kPa
bar x 14.5 = psi x 0.069 = bar
kp/cm 2 x 14.22 = psi x 0.070 = kp/cm2
N/mm 2 x 145.04 = psi x 0.069 = bar
MPa x 145 = psi x 0.00689 = MPa
Power (W = J/s)
kW x 1.36 = hp (cv) x 0.736 = kW
kW x 1.34 = bhp x 0.746 = kW
kW x 0.948 = Btu/s x 1.055 = kW
W x 0.74 = ft lb/s x 1.36 = W
Energy (J = Nm)
kJ x 0.948 = Btu x 1.055 = kJ
J x 0.239 = calorie x 4.19 = J
Speed and acceleration
m/s2 x 3.28 = ft/s2 x 0.305 = m/s2
m/s x 3.28 = ft/s x 0.305 = m/s
km/h x 0.62 = mph x 1.61 = km/h
Horsepower/torque
Bhp x 5252 rpm= TQ (lb ft) TQ x rpm 5252 = bhp
Temperature
°C = (°F – 32)/1.8 °F = (°C x 1.8) + 32
Flow factor
l/min (dm3 /min) x 0.264 = US gal/min x 3.785 = litre/min

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:16 F Technical data – Technical data

Conversion table, length


Unit cm m km in ft yd mile
cm 1 0.01 0.00001 0.3937 0.03281 0.01094 0.000006
m 100 1 0.001 39.37 3.2808 1.0936 0.00062
km 100000 1000 1 39370.7 3280.8 1093.6 0.62137
in 2.54 0.0254 0.000025 1 0.08333 0.02777 0.000015
ft 30.48 0.3048 0.000304 12 1 0.3333 0.000189
yd 91.44 0.9144 0.000914 36 3 1 0.000568
mile 160930 1609.3 1.6093 63360 5280 1760 1
1 mm = 0.1 cm - 1 mm = 0.001 m

Conversion table, area


Unit cm2 m2 km2 a ft2 yd2 in2
cm2 1 0.0001 - 0.000001 0.001076 0.000012 0.155000
m2 10000 1 0.000001 0.01 10.764 1.1958 1550.000
km2 - 1000000 1 10000 1076400 1195800 -
a 0.01 100 0.0001 1 1076.4 119.58 -

ft2 - 0.092903 - 0.000929 1 0.1111 144.000


yd2 - 0.83613 - 0.008361 9 1 1296.00
in2 6.4516 0.000645 - - 0.006943 0.000771 1
1 ha = 100 a – 1 mile2 = 259 ha = 2.59 km2

Conversion table, volume


Unit cm3 = cc m3 l in3 ft3 yd3
cm3 = ml 1 0.000001 0.001 0.061024 0.000035 0.000001
m3 1000000 1 1000 61024 35.315 1.30796
dm3 (l) 1000 0.001 1 61.024 0.035315 0.001308
in3 16.387 0.000016 0.01638 1 0.000578 0.000021
ft3 28316.8 0.028317 28.317 1728 1 0.03704
yd3 764529.8 0.76453 764.53 46656 27 1
1 gal (US) = 3785.41 cm3 = 231 in3 = 0.83267 gal (UK)

Conversion table, weight


Unit g kg t oz lb
g 1 0.001 0.000001 0.03527 0.0022
kg 1000 1 0.001 35.273 2.20459
t 1000000 1000 1 35273 2204.59
oz 28.3495 0.02835 0.000028 1 0.0625
lb 453.592 0.45359 0.000454 16 1
1 tonne (metric) = 1.1023 ton (US) = 0.9842 ton (UK)

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


F Technical data – Technical data F:17

Conversion table, pressure


Unit kp/cm2 bar Pa=N/m2 kPa lbf/in2 lbf/ft2
kp/cm2 1 0.98067 98066.5 98.0665 14.2233 2048.16
bar 1.01972 1 100000 100 14.5037 2088.6
Pa=N/m2 0.00001 0.001 1 0.001 0.00015 0.02086
kPa 0.01020 0.01 1000 1 0.14504 20.886
lbf/in2 0.07032 0.0689 6894.76 6.89476 1 144
lbf/ft2 0.00047 0.00047 47.88028 0.04788 0.00694 1
kg/cm2 = 735,56 Dry (mmHg) = 0.96784 atm

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


F:18

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


G:1

G Terminology and index

Contents G Terminology and index


Terminology and index .....................................................................................G:3
Terminology..................................................................................................... G:3
Index ............................................................................................................... G:5

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


G:2

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


G Terminology and index – Terminology and index G:3

G Terminology and index


Terminology
Explanations
Term Description
Accumulator Reservoir that stores (accumulates) pressure for i.e. hydraulic functions.
Attachment Part of the machine that grabs the load when lifting.
Anti-corrosion agent Prevents oxidation, in simple terms, rustproofing.
Working hydraulics All load handling functions, i.e. lift and lower, tilt, side shift, spreader and levelling.
Axle distance Distance between drive axle and steering axle.
Bar Unit for measuring pressure.
Battery disconnector Cuts off current from battery.
Daily inspection The actions that should be performed daily to ensure the machine’s functionality.
Decitonne Tenth of a tonne, measure of the machine's lifting capacity.
Display "Window" showing digital information on steering wheel panel in cab.
Operating hours Number of hours machine has been in operation, shown on hour meter in cab.
Drive axle Driving axle that receives the torque from the drivetrain.
Drivetrain Parts in machine involved in power transmission; engine, torque converter, transmission,
propeller shaft and drive axle with differential and hub reduction.
ECC Electric Climate Control. Climate control unit with thermostat-controlled cooling,
dehumidification, and heating.
EHC Electric Heat Control. Heating system with thermostat-controlled heating.
Electrolyte level Fluid level in battery cells.
Expansion tank Tank for coolant.
Fixed displacement Non-adjustable volume (capacity) of a pump.
Hanging load Lifted load.
FMI Fault Message Identifier.
Main fuse Located by battery. Cuts the power to all systems in the whole machine.
Hydraulic oil Oil for hydraulic system. See specifications in operator's manual.
Hydraulic oil pump Pump in hydraulic system.
Hydraulic system System that uses oil pressure to transmit power to different functions.
Indicator Manual "sensor", e.g., shows that a filter is clogged and needs to be replaced.
Refrigerant Fluid/gas in air conditioning. May only be handled by authorised trained person.
Low-emission engine Engine with low emissions of hazardous substances. Manufactured according to
regulations.
LC Load centre.
Lifting capacity Indicates machine's maximum lifting capacity.
Lifting point Attaching point for lift device when lifting an object.
Trolley Lifts the load, located on the mast.
Lock hooks Two hooks that are inserted down/into holes in the container in order to secure the
container when lifting.
Solenoid valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. See also proportional valve.
Control valve Valves that can be used to control something, e.g., release pressure and thus lower
a boom or a fork.

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


G:4 G Terminology and index – Terminology

Term Description
Machine model Machine type. Indicated, for example: DCF 80–100. See also type designation.
Environmental waste Used oils, filters, etc., must be handled according to governing national laws and
regulations.
Torque converter Hydraulic, variable clutch.
Hub reduction Type of final drive (often next to drive wheel) that reduces rpm and increases torque
from the drivetrain.
Pilot oil pressure A low control pressure to, for example, a valve.
Planetary gear Type of transmission with gears in constant mesh.
Product alternatives One of several alternatives is selected for a machine, e.g., engine alternative.
Proportional valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. If a current is applied, the valve is activated
in proportion to the current's amplitude. In everyday language, a stepless valve, as
opposed to an Off/On valve. On, e.g., the transmission's valve housing.
Frame beam Supporting beams in the frame.
Recirculation Circulates again and again.
Serial number Unique machine designation. Available on machine plate.
Service position How machine should be safely positioned before service may be started.
Servo A small user movement results in a big machine movement, e.g. power steering.
Servo pressure A low control pressure to control a higher pressure, for example, to a valve.
Side lift Attachment. See attachment.
Side shift Parallel sideways movement of attachment.
Levelling Attachment is tilted, for example, if load stands on uneven ground.
Spirit Delta Enclosed type of cab.
SPN Suspect Parameter Number.
Spreading Widening of attachment.
Mast Carrier of trolley, attachment and load.
Dust reservoir The air filter collects the coarsest particles in a dust reservoir, emptied automatically
during operation.
Steering axle Wheel axle with steering.
Buzzer Audible alarm to catch the operator’s attention.
Option Optional equipment for machine.
Tilting Load is tilted forward or backward.
Transmission oil Oil for transmission and torque converter. See specifications in operator's manual.
Securing machine for transport Actions before transporting machine.
Twistlocks Two lock pins, one in each corner of the attachment, pushed down in corresponding
holes in container and twisted to lock the container for lifting.
Type designation Indicates type of machine and capacity. See also machine model.
Maintenance Periodic maintenance actions so that machine functions safely and for long life.
Variable pump Pump with adjustable flow rate.
Variable displacement Adjustable volume (capacity) of a pump.
Wet brakes Brake discs in oil-bath.
Valve slide Moving part in the valve. Decides the oil's path.

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


G Terminology and index – Index G:5

Index ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entertainment and communication
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 8:17
. . 9:35
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:20
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:8, D:1
A Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:22
About the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:10 EXT-ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
About the maintenance manual . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3 EXTRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
AdBlue filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13 F
Air cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20 Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:11
Air intake and exhaust outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:18 Fine filter hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:15
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:11 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:42
Axial piston pump with variable displacement . . . . . . 10:7 Frame, body, cab and accessories . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
FREELIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
Fresh air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:26
B Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:12
Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9 Fuel prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Battery voltage (30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:13 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Body structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:43 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Breather filter hydraulic oil tank . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12
Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6 G
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3
Glass/windows/mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:36
C
CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8:15
Cab interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9:41 H
Cab structure and suspension . . . . . . . . . . . .9:37 Heating, ventilation and air conditioning . . . . . . . . 9:14
Cab tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9:38 Height limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Cab undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9:38 Height warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
CAN bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:21 Hoses, pipes and valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8
CAN-bus drivetrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:21 HYD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:16
CAN/POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13 Hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:13
Central lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:44 Hydraulic oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12
CLIMATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Common electrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Common hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3 I
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:21
I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
Complete machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0:3
Ignition voltage (15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:15
Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:27
Ignition/heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:35
Container counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:49
Intercooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:22
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Control system engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:34
Control system transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:19 L
Controls and instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4, 9:4 Levelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:30
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:26 Lifting hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:40
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24 Lifting/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24, 2:12 Lighting system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:30
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Link arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
D Load carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:33
Load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:31, 2:9
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E:1
Distribution of electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:12
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:37
Drive axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 M
Driveline/Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3 Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:9, 7:29
Mechanical transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Moisture filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:27
E Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
MOVE-CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
EL-STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
ELECTRIC SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Electrical protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
Electronic box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:18 O
Emergency stop switch voltage (15E) . . . . . . . . 11:16 Oil filter, brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3 Oil pump brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:7

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


G:6 G Terminology and index – Terminology

OLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22 Side shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:16


OPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25 Signalling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:33
Other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:49 Speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Speed reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:49
Spreader beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:24
P Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:19
Start battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9
Paint/coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:46 Start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
Parking brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Parking brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9 Steering axle cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Parking brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3–6:4
Position sensor mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:13
Power assisted system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Power-assisted brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5 T
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3
Propeller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4 Tanks and accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:5
Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:6 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F:3
Temperature control, cleaning and hydraulic oil . . . . . 10:9
Temperature control, cleaning and oil brake system . . . 4:14
R Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G:3
Terminology and index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G:3
Radiator and expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24 Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:27
Reading instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4 Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:29
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:36 Torque converter/Clutch system . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Redundant CAN-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:21 TRANSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:18
Redundant voltage feed of control units . . . . . . . 11:14 Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15 Trolley. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:14
RMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25 Twistlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:33
RMI (Remote Machine Interface) . . . . . . . . . . 11:22 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Roof window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:36 Tyres and rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7

S V
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:3 VBFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Safety and emergency equipment. . . . . . . . . . . 9:10 Voltage converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:17
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:4 Voltage feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:12
Safety valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:11
Sensor steering wheel reading . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9 W
Sensor, hydraulic pressure lift cylinder . . . . . . . . . 7:9
Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7 Wheel hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Servo filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7, 7:29 Wheel spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26 Wiper/washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:29

UDCF05.01GB Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100


G Terminology and index – Index G:7

Maintenance Manual DCF 80–100 UDCF05.01GB


last page

Cargotec Sweden AB
Cargotec improves the efficiency of cargo flows by offering solutions for Torggatan 3
the loading and unloading of goods on land and at sea – wherever cargo SE-340 10, Lidhult, Sweden
is on the move. Cargotec’s main daughter brands for cargo handling
Hiab, Kalmar and MacGregor are global market leaders in their fields. tel. +46 372 260 00
Cargotec’s global network offers extensive services that ensure the fax +46 372 263 90
continuous, reliable and sustainable performance of equipment. www.cargotec.com

You might also like